Web   ·   Wiki   ·   Activities   ·   Blog   ·   Lists   ·   Chat   ·   Meeting   ·   Bugs   ·   Git   ·   Translate   ·   Archive   ·   People   ·   Donate
summaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/vim73/doc/eval.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'vim73/doc/eval.txt')
-rw-r--r--vim73/doc/eval.txt8365
1 files changed, 8365 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/vim73/doc/eval.txt b/vim73/doc/eval.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1c0b02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/vim73/doc/eval.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8365 @@
+*eval.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2010 Dec 01
+
+
+ VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar
+
+
+Expression evaluation *expression* *expr* *E15* *eval*
+
+Using expressions is introduced in chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|.
+
+Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time. If this has been
+done, the features in this document are not available. See |+eval| and
+|no-eval-feature|.
+
+1. Variables |variables|
+ 1.1 Variable types
+ 1.2 Function references |Funcref|
+ 1.3 Lists |Lists|
+ 1.4 Dictionaries |Dictionaries|
+ 1.5 More about variables |more-variables|
+2. Expression syntax |expression-syntax|
+3. Internal variable |internal-variables|
+4. Builtin Functions |functions|
+5. Defining functions |user-functions|
+6. Curly braces names |curly-braces-names|
+7. Commands |expression-commands|
+8. Exception handling |exception-handling|
+9. Examples |eval-examples|
+10. No +eval feature |no-eval-feature|
+11. The sandbox |eval-sandbox|
+12. Textlock |textlock|
+
+{Vi does not have any of these commands}
+
+==============================================================================
+1. Variables *variables*
+
+1.1 Variable types ~
+ *E712*
+There are six types of variables:
+
+Number A 32 bit signed number. |expr-number| *Number*
+ Examples: -123 0x10 0177
+
+Float A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float*
+ {only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+ Examples: 123.456 1.15e-6 -1.1e3
+
+String A NUL terminated string of 8-bit unsigned characters (bytes).
+ |expr-string| Examples: "ab\txx\"--" 'x-z''a,c'
+
+Funcref A reference to a function |Funcref|.
+ Example: function("strlen")
+
+List An ordered sequence of items |List|.
+ Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']]
+
+Dictionary An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a
+ value. |Dictionary|
+ Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"}
+
+The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they
+are used.
+
+Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of
+the Number. Examples:
+ Number 123 --> String "123" ~
+ Number 0 --> String "0" ~
+ Number -1 --> String "-1" ~
+ *octal*
+Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits
+to a number. Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized. If
+the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero. Examples:
+ String "456" --> Number 456 ~
+ String "6bar" --> Number 6 ~
+ String "foo" --> Number 0 ~
+ String "0xf1" --> Number 241 ~
+ String "0100" --> Number 64 ~
+ String "-8" --> Number -8 ~
+ String "+8" --> Number 0 ~
+
+To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: >
+ :echo "0100" + 0
+< 64 ~
+
+To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different
+base, use |str2nr()|.
+
+For boolean operators Numbers are used. Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE.
+
+Note that in the command >
+ :if "foo"
+"foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE. To test for a non-empty string,
+use strlen(): >
+ :if strlen("foo")
+< *E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731*
+List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted.
+
+ *E805* *E806* *E808*
+When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float. Otherwise
+there is no automatic conversion of Float. You can use str2float() for String
+to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number.
+
+ *E706* *sticky-type-checking*
+You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable. You need
+to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error. String and Number are considered
+equivalent though, as well are Float and Number. Consider this sequence of
+commands: >
+ :let l = "string"
+ :let l = 44 " changes type from String to Number
+ :let l = [1, 2, 3] " error! l is still a Number
+ :let l = 4.4 " changes type from Number to Float
+ :let l = "string" " error!
+
+
+1.2 Function references ~
+ *Funcref* *E695* *E718*
+A Funcref variable is obtained with the |function()| function. It can be used
+in an expression in the place of a function name, before the parenthesis
+around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to. Example: >
+
+ :let Fn = function("MyFunc")
+ :echo Fn()
+< *E704* *E705* *E707*
+A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:". You
+cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name.
+
+A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a
+Dictionary entry. Example: >
+ :function dict.init() dict
+ : let self.val = 0
+ :endfunction
+
+The key of the Dictionary can start with a lower case letter. The actual
+function name is not used here. Also see |numbered-function|.
+
+A Funcref can also be used with the |:call| command: >
+ :call Fn()
+ :call dict.init()
+
+The name of the referenced function can be obtained with |string()|. >
+ :let func = string(Fn)
+
+You can use |call()| to invoke a Funcref and use a list variable for the
+arguments: >
+ :let r = call(Fn, mylist)
+
+
+1.3 Lists ~
+ *List* *Lists* *E686*
+A List is an ordered sequence of items. An item can be of any type. Items
+can be accessed by their index number. Items can be added and removed at any
+position in the sequence.
+
+
+List creation ~
+ *E696* *E697*
+A List is created with a comma separated list of items in square brackets.
+Examples: >
+ :let mylist = [1, two, 3, "four"]
+ :let emptylist = []
+
+An item can be any expression. Using a List for an item creates a
+List of Lists: >
+ :let nestlist = [[11, 12], [21, 22], [31, 32]]
+
+An extra comma after the last item is ignored.
+
+
+List index ~
+ *list-index* *E684*
+An item in the List can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets
+after the List. Indexes are zero-based, thus the first item has index zero. >
+ :let item = mylist[0] " get the first item: 1
+ :let item = mylist[2] " get the third item: 3
+
+When the resulting item is a list this can be repeated: >
+ :let item = nestlist[0][1] " get the first list, second item: 12
+<
+A negative index is counted from the end. Index -1 refers to the last item in
+the List, -2 to the last but one item, etc. >
+ :let last = mylist[-1] " get the last item: "four"
+
+To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function. When an item
+is not available it returns zero or the default value you specify: >
+ :echo get(mylist, idx)
+ :echo get(mylist, idx, "NONE")
+
+
+List concatenation ~
+
+Two lists can be concatenated with the "+" operator: >
+ :let longlist = mylist + [5, 6]
+ :let mylist += [7, 8]
+
+To prepend or append an item turn the item into a list by putting [] around
+it. To change a list in-place see |list-modification| below.
+
+
+Sublist ~
+
+A part of the List can be obtained by specifying the first and last index,
+separated by a colon in square brackets: >
+ :let shortlist = mylist[2:-1] " get List [3, "four"]
+
+Omitting the first index is similar to zero. Omitting the last index is
+similar to -1. >
+ :let endlist = mylist[2:] " from item 2 to the end: [3, "four"]
+ :let shortlist = mylist[2:2] " List with one item: [3]
+ :let otherlist = mylist[:] " make a copy of the List
+
+If the first index is beyond the last item of the List or the second item is
+before the first item, the result is an empty list. There is no error
+message.
+
+If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the
+length minus one is used: >
+ :let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3]
+ :echo mylist[2:8] " result: [2, 3]
+
+NOTE: mylist[s:e] means using the variable "s:e" as index. Watch out for
+using a single letter variable before the ":". Insert a space when needed:
+mylist[s : e].
+
+
+List identity ~
+ *list-identity*
+When variable "aa" is a list and you assign it to another variable "bb", both
+variables refer to the same list. Thus changing the list "aa" will also
+change "bb": >
+ :let aa = [1, 2, 3]
+ :let bb = aa
+ :call add(aa, 4)
+ :echo bb
+< [1, 2, 3, 4]
+
+Making a copy of a list is done with the |copy()| function. Using [:] also
+works, as explained above. This creates a shallow copy of the list: Changing
+a list item in the list will also change the item in the copied list: >
+ :let aa = [[1, 'a'], 2, 3]
+ :let bb = copy(aa)
+ :call add(aa, 4)
+ :let aa[0][1] = 'aaa'
+ :echo aa
+< [[1, aaa], 2, 3, 4] >
+ :echo bb
+< [[1, aaa], 2, 3]
+
+To make a completely independent list use |deepcopy()|. This also makes a
+copy of the values in the list, recursively. Up to a hundred levels deep.
+
+The operator "is" can be used to check if two variables refer to the same
+List. "isnot" does the opposite. In contrast "==" compares if two lists have
+the same value. >
+ :let alist = [1, 2, 3]
+ :let blist = [1, 2, 3]
+ :echo alist is blist
+< 0 >
+ :echo alist == blist
+< 1
+
+Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the
+same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==". There is one
+exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered
+different. There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on
+variables. Example: >
+ echo 4 == "4"
+< 1 >
+ echo [4] == ["4"]
+< 0
+
+Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings. You
+can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a list: >
+
+ :let a = 5
+ :let b = "5"
+ :echo a == b
+< 1 >
+ :echo [a] == [b]
+< 0
+
+
+List unpack ~
+
+To unpack the items in a list to individual variables, put the variables in
+square brackets, like list items: >
+ :let [var1, var2] = mylist
+
+When the number of variables does not match the number of items in the list
+this produces an error. To handle any extra items from the list append ";"
+and a variable name: >
+ :let [var1, var2; rest] = mylist
+
+This works like: >
+ :let var1 = mylist[0]
+ :let var2 = mylist[1]
+ :let rest = mylist[2:]
+
+Except that there is no error if there are only two items. "rest" will be an
+empty list then.
+
+
+List modification ~
+ *list-modification*
+To change a specific item of a list use |:let| this way: >
+ :let list[4] = "four"
+ :let listlist[0][3] = item
+
+To change part of a list you can specify the first and last item to be
+modified. The value must at least have the number of items in the range: >
+ :let list[3:5] = [3, 4, 5]
+
+Adding and removing items from a list is done with functions. Here are a few
+examples: >
+ :call insert(list, 'a') " prepend item 'a'
+ :call insert(list, 'a', 3) " insert item 'a' before list[3]
+ :call add(list, "new") " append String item
+ :call add(list, [1, 2]) " append a List as one new item
+ :call extend(list, [1, 2]) " extend the list with two more items
+ :let i = remove(list, 3) " remove item 3
+ :unlet list[3] " idem
+ :let l = remove(list, 3, -1) " remove items 3 to last item
+ :unlet list[3 : ] " idem
+ :call filter(list, 'v:val !~ "x"') " remove items with an 'x'
+
+Changing the order of items in a list: >
+ :call sort(list) " sort a list alphabetically
+ :call reverse(list) " reverse the order of items
+
+
+For loop ~
+
+The |:for| loop executes commands for each item in a list. A variable is set
+to each item in the list in sequence. Example: >
+ :for item in mylist
+ : call Doit(item)
+ :endfor
+
+This works like: >
+ :let index = 0
+ :while index < len(mylist)
+ : let item = mylist[index]
+ : :call Doit(item)
+ : let index = index + 1
+ :endwhile
+
+Note that all items in the list should be of the same type, otherwise this
+results in error |E706|. To avoid this |:unlet| the variable at the end of
+the loop.
+
+If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()|
+function will be a simpler method than a for loop.
+
+Just like the |:let| command, |:for| also accepts a list of variables. This
+requires the argument to be a list of lists. >
+ :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 8], [3, 0]]
+ : call Doit(lnum, col)
+ :endfor
+
+This works like a |:let| command is done for each list item. Again, the types
+must remain the same to avoid an error.
+
+It is also possible to put remaining items in a List variable: >
+ :for [i, j; rest] in listlist
+ : call Doit(i, j)
+ : if !empty(rest)
+ : echo "remainder: " . string(rest)
+ : endif
+ :endfor
+
+
+List functions ~
+ *E714*
+Functions that are useful with a List: >
+ :let r = call(funcname, list) " call a function with an argument list
+ :if empty(list) " check if list is empty
+ :let l = len(list) " number of items in list
+ :let big = max(list) " maximum value in list
+ :let small = min(list) " minimum value in list
+ :let xs = count(list, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in list
+ :let i = index(list, 'x') " index of first 'x' in list
+ :let lines = getline(1, 10) " get ten text lines from buffer
+ :call append('$', lines) " append text lines in buffer
+ :let list = split("a b c") " create list from items in a string
+ :let string = join(list, ', ') " create string from list items
+ :let s = string(list) " String representation of list
+ :call map(list, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item
+
+Don't forget that a combination of features can make things simple. For
+example, to add up all the numbers in a list: >
+ :exe 'let sum = ' . join(nrlist, '+')
+
+
+1.4 Dictionaries ~
+ *Dictionaries* *Dictionary*
+A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value. The
+entry can be located with the key. The entries are stored without a specific
+ordering.
+
+
+Dictionary creation ~
+ *E720* *E721* *E722* *E723*
+A Dictionary is created with a comma separated list of entries in curly
+braces. Each entry has a key and a value, separated by a colon. Each key can
+only appear once. Examples: >
+ :let mydict = {1: 'one', 2: 'two', 3: 'three'}
+ :let emptydict = {}
+< *E713* *E716* *E717*
+A key is always a String. You can use a Number, it will be converted to a
+String automatically. Thus the String '4' and the number 4 will find the same
+entry. Note that the String '04' and the Number 04 are different, since the
+Number will be converted to the String '4'.
+
+A value can be any expression. Using a Dictionary for a value creates a
+nested Dictionary: >
+ :let nestdict = {1: {11: 'a', 12: 'b'}, 2: {21: 'c'}}
+
+An extra comma after the last entry is ignored.
+
+
+Accessing entries ~
+
+The normal way to access an entry is by putting the key in square brackets: >
+ :let val = mydict["one"]
+ :let mydict["four"] = 4
+
+You can add new entries to an existing Dictionary this way, unlike Lists.
+
+For keys that consist entirely of letters, digits and underscore the following
+form can be used |expr-entry|: >
+ :let val = mydict.one
+ :let mydict.four = 4
+
+Since an entry can be any type, also a List and a Dictionary, the indexing and
+key lookup can be repeated: >
+ :echo dict.key[idx].key
+
+
+Dictionary to List conversion ~
+
+You may want to loop over the entries in a dictionary. For this you need to
+turn the Dictionary into a List and pass it to |:for|.
+
+Most often you want to loop over the keys, using the |keys()| function: >
+ :for key in keys(mydict)
+ : echo key . ': ' . mydict[key]
+ :endfor
+
+The List of keys is unsorted. You may want to sort them first: >
+ :for key in sort(keys(mydict))
+
+To loop over the values use the |values()| function: >
+ :for v in values(mydict)
+ : echo "value: " . v
+ :endfor
+
+If you want both the key and the value use the |items()| function. It returns
+a List in which each item is a List with two items, the key and the value: >
+ :for [key, value] in items(mydict)
+ : echo key . ': ' . value
+ :endfor
+
+
+Dictionary identity ~
+ *dict-identity*
+Just like Lists you need to use |copy()| and |deepcopy()| to make a copy of a
+Dictionary. Otherwise, assignment results in referring to the same
+Dictionary: >
+ :let onedict = {'a': 1, 'b': 2}
+ :let adict = onedict
+ :let adict['a'] = 11
+ :echo onedict['a']
+ 11
+
+Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal. For
+more info see |list-identity|.
+
+
+Dictionary modification ~
+ *dict-modification*
+To change an already existing entry of a Dictionary, or to add a new entry,
+use |:let| this way: >
+ :let dict[4] = "four"
+ :let dict['one'] = item
+
+Removing an entry from a Dictionary is done with |remove()| or |:unlet|.
+Three ways to remove the entry with key "aaa" from dict: >
+ :let i = remove(dict, 'aaa')
+ :unlet dict.aaa
+ :unlet dict['aaa']
+
+Merging a Dictionary with another is done with |extend()|: >
+ :call extend(adict, bdict)
+This extends adict with all entries from bdict. Duplicate keys cause entries
+in adict to be overwritten. An optional third argument can change this.
+Note that the order of entries in a Dictionary is irrelevant, thus don't
+expect ":echo adict" to show the items from bdict after the older entries in
+adict.
+
+Weeding out entries from a Dictionary can be done with |filter()|: >
+ :call filter(dict, 'v:val =~ "x"')
+This removes all entries from "dict" with a value not matching 'x'.
+
+
+Dictionary function ~
+ *Dictionary-function* *self* *E725*
+When a function is defined with the "dict" attribute it can be used in a
+special way with a dictionary. Example: >
+ :function Mylen() dict
+ : return len(self.data)
+ :endfunction
+ :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3], 'len': function("Mylen")}
+ :echo mydict.len()
+
+This is like a method in object oriented programming. The entry in the
+Dictionary is a |Funcref|. The local variable "self" refers to the dictionary
+the function was invoked from.
+
+It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a
+Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then.
+
+ *numbered-function* *anonymous-function*
+To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly
+assigned to a Dictionary in this way: >
+ :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]}
+ :function mydict.len() dict
+ : return len(self.data)
+ :endfunction
+ :echo mydict.len()
+
+The function will then get a number and the value of dict.len is a |Funcref|
+that references this function. The function can only be used through a
+|Funcref|. It will automatically be deleted when there is no |Funcref|
+remaining that refers to it.
+
+It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function.
+
+If you get an error for a numbered function, you can find out what it is with
+a trick. Assuming the function is 42, the command is: >
+ :function {42}
+
+
+Functions for Dictionaries ~
+ *E715*
+Functions that can be used with a Dictionary: >
+ :if has_key(dict, 'foo') " TRUE if dict has entry with key "foo"
+ :if empty(dict) " TRUE if dict is empty
+ :let l = len(dict) " number of items in dict
+ :let big = max(dict) " maximum value in dict
+ :let small = min(dict) " minimum value in dict
+ :let xs = count(dict, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in dict
+ :let s = string(dict) " String representation of dict
+ :call map(dict, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item
+
+
+1.5 More about variables ~
+ *more-variables*
+If you need to know the type of a variable or expression, use the |type()|
+function.
+
+When the '!' flag is included in the 'viminfo' option, global variables that
+start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter, are
+stored in the viminfo file |viminfo-file|.
+
+When the 'sessionoptions' option contains "global", global variables that
+start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter are
+stored in the session file |session-file|.
+
+variable name can be stored where ~
+my_var_6 not
+My_Var_6 session file
+MY_VAR_6 viminfo file
+
+
+It's possible to form a variable name with curly braces, see
+|curly-braces-names|.
+
+==============================================================================
+2. Expression syntax *expression-syntax*
+
+Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant:
+
+|expr1| expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 if-then-else
+
+|expr2| expr3 || expr3 .. logical OR
+
+|expr3| expr4 && expr4 .. logical AND
+
+|expr4| expr5 == expr5 equal
+ expr5 != expr5 not equal
+ expr5 > expr5 greater than
+ expr5 >= expr5 greater than or equal
+ expr5 < expr5 smaller than
+ expr5 <= expr5 smaller than or equal
+ expr5 =~ expr5 regexp matches
+ expr5 !~ expr5 regexp doesn't match
+
+ expr5 ==? expr5 equal, ignoring case
+ expr5 ==# expr5 equal, match case
+ etc. As above, append ? for ignoring case, # for
+ matching case
+
+ expr5 is expr5 same |List| instance
+ expr5 isnot expr5 different |List| instance
+
+|expr5| expr6 + expr6 .. number addition or list concatenation
+ expr6 - expr6 .. number subtraction
+ expr6 . expr6 .. string concatenation
+
+|expr6| expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication
+ expr7 / expr7 .. number division
+ expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo
+
+|expr7| ! expr7 logical NOT
+ - expr7 unary minus
+ + expr7 unary plus
+
+
+|expr8| expr8[expr1] byte of a String or item of a |List|
+ expr8[expr1 : expr1] substring of a String or sublist of a |List|
+ expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary|
+ expr8(expr1, ...) function call with |Funcref| variable
+
+|expr9| number number constant
+ "string" string constant, backslash is special
+ 'string' string constant, ' is doubled
+ [expr1, ...] |List|
+ {expr1: expr1, ...} |Dictionary|
+ &option option value
+ (expr1) nested expression
+ variable internal variable
+ va{ria}ble internal variable with curly braces
+ $VAR environment variable
+ @r contents of register 'r'
+ function(expr1, ...) function call
+ func{ti}on(expr1, ...) function call with curly braces
+
+
+".." indicates that the operations in this level can be concatenated.
+Example: >
+ &nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
+
+All expressions within one level are parsed from left to right.
+
+
+expr1 *expr1* *E109*
+-----
+
+expr2 ? expr1 : expr1
+
+The expression before the '?' is evaluated to a number. If it evaluates to
+non-zero, the result is the value of the expression between the '?' and ':',
+otherwise the result is the value of the expression after the ':'.
+Example: >
+ :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum
+
+Since the first expression is an "expr2", it cannot contain another ?:. The
+other two expressions can, thus allow for recursive use of ?:.
+Example: >
+ :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum == 1000 ? "last" : lnum
+
+To keep this readable, using |line-continuation| is suggested: >
+ :echo lnum == 1
+ :\ ? "top"
+ :\ : lnum == 1000
+ :\ ? "last"
+ :\ : lnum
+
+You should always put a space before the ':', otherwise it can be mistaken for
+use in a variable such as "a:1".
+
+
+expr2 and expr3 *expr2* *expr3*
+---------------
+
+ *expr-barbar* *expr-&&*
+The "||" and "&&" operators take one argument on each side. The arguments
+are (converted to) Numbers. The result is:
+
+ input output ~
+n1 n2 n1 || n2 n1 && n2 ~
+zero zero zero zero
+zero non-zero non-zero zero
+non-zero zero non-zero zero
+non-zero non-zero non-zero non-zero
+
+The operators can be concatenated, for example: >
+
+ &nu || &list && &shell == "csh"
+
+Note that "&&" takes precedence over "||", so this has the meaning of: >
+
+ &nu || (&list && &shell == "csh")
+
+Once the result is known, the expression "short-circuits", that is, further
+arguments are not evaluated. This is like what happens in C. For example: >
+
+ let a = 1
+ echo a || b
+
+This is valid even if there is no variable called "b" because "a" is non-zero,
+so the result must be non-zero. Similarly below: >
+
+ echo exists("b") && b == "yes"
+
+This is valid whether "b" has been defined or not. The second clause will
+only be evaluated if "b" has been defined.
+
+
+expr4 *expr4*
+-----
+
+expr5 {cmp} expr5
+
+Compare two expr5 expressions, resulting in a 0 if it evaluates to false, or 1
+if it evaluates to true.
+
+ *expr-==* *expr-!=* *expr->* *expr->=*
+ *expr-<* *expr-<=* *expr-=~* *expr-!~*
+ *expr-==#* *expr-!=#* *expr->#* *expr->=#*
+ *expr-<#* *expr-<=#* *expr-=~#* *expr-!~#*
+ *expr-==?* *expr-!=?* *expr->?* *expr->=?*
+ *expr-<?* *expr-<=?* *expr-=~?* *expr-!~?*
+ *expr-is*
+ use 'ignorecase' match case ignore case ~
+equal == ==# ==?
+not equal != !=# !=?
+greater than > ># >?
+greater than or equal >= >=# >=?
+smaller than < <# <?
+smaller than or equal <= <=# <=?
+regexp matches =~ =~# =~?
+regexp doesn't match !~ !~# !~?
+same instance is
+different instance isnot
+
+Examples:
+"abc" ==# "Abc" evaluates to 0
+"abc" ==? "Abc" evaluates to 1
+"abc" == "Abc" evaluates to 1 if 'ignorecase' is set, 0 otherwise
+
+ *E691* *E692*
+A |List| can only be compared with a |List| and only "equal", "not equal" and
+"is" can be used. This compares the values of the list, recursively.
+Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
+
+ *E735* *E736*
+A |Dictionary| can only be compared with a |Dictionary| and only "equal", "not
+equal" and "is" can be used. This compares the key/values of the |Dictionary|
+recursively. Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values.
+
+ *E693* *E694*
+A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal" and "not
+equal" can be used. Case is never ignored.
+
+When using "is" or "isnot" with a |List| this checks if the expressions are
+referring to the same |List| instance. A copy of a |List| is different from
+the original |List|. When using "is" without a |List| it is equivalent to
+using "equal", using "isnot" equivalent to using "not equal". Except that a
+different type means the values are different. "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'"
+is false.
+
+When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number,
+and the comparison is done on Numbers. This means that "0 == 'x'" is TRUE,
+because 'x' converted to a Number is zero.
+
+When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp(). This
+results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not
+necessarily the alphabetical difference in the local language.
+
+When using the operators with a trailing '#', or the short version and
+'ignorecase' is off, the comparing is done with strcmp(): case matters.
+
+When using the operators with a trailing '?', or the short version and
+'ignorecase' is set, the comparing is done with stricmp(): case is ignored.
+
+'smartcase' is not used.
+
+The "=~" and "!~" operators match the lefthand argument with the righthand
+argument, which is used as a pattern. See |pattern| for what a pattern is.
+This matching is always done like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no
+matter what the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is. This makes scripts
+portable. To avoid backslashes in the regexp pattern to be doubled, use a
+single-quote string, see |literal-string|.
+Since a string is considered to be a single line, a multi-line pattern
+(containing \n, backslash-n) will not match. However, a literal NL character
+can be matched like an ordinary character. Examples:
+ "foo\nbar" =~ "\n" evaluates to 1
+ "foo\nbar" =~ "\\n" evaluates to 0
+
+
+expr5 and expr6 *expr5* *expr6*
+---------------
+expr6 + expr6 .. Number addition or |List| concatenation *expr-+*
+expr6 - expr6 .. Number subtraction *expr--*
+expr6 . expr6 .. String concatenation *expr-.*
+
+For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list. The
+result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated.
+
+expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication *expr-star*
+expr7 / expr7 .. number division *expr-/*
+expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo *expr-%*
+
+For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers.
+
+Note the difference between "+" and ".":
+ "123" + "456" = 579
+ "123" . "456" = "123456"
+
+Since '.' has the same precedence as '+' and '-', you need to read: >
+ 1 . 90 + 90.0
+As: >
+ (1 . 90) + 90.0
+That works, since the String "190" is automatically converted to the Number
+190, which can be added to the Float 90.0. However: >
+ 1 . 90 * 90.0
+Should be read as: >
+ 1 . (90 * 90.0)
+Since '.' has lower precedence than '*'. This does NOT work, since this
+attempts to concatenate a Float and a String.
+
+When dividing a Number by zero the result depends on the value:
+ 0 / 0 = -0x80000000 (like NaN for Float)
+ >0 / 0 = 0x7fffffff (like positive infinity)
+ <0 / 0 = -0x7fffffff (like negative infinity)
+ (before Vim 7.2 it was always 0x7fffffff)
+
+When the righthand side of '%' is zero, the result is 0.
+
+None of these work for |Funcref|s.
+
+. and % do not work for Float. *E804*
+
+
+expr7 *expr7*
+-----
+! expr7 logical NOT *expr-!*
+- expr7 unary minus *expr-unary--*
++ expr7 unary plus *expr-unary-+*
+
+For '!' non-zero becomes zero, zero becomes one.
+For '-' the sign of the number is changed.
+For '+' the number is unchanged.
+
+A String will be converted to a Number first.
+
+These three can be repeated and mixed. Examples:
+ !-1 == 0
+ !!8 == 1
+ --9 == 9
+
+
+expr8 *expr8*
+-----
+expr8[expr1] item of String or |List| *expr-[]* *E111*
+
+If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the
+expr1'th single byte from expr8. expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a
+Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for
+an alternative.
+
+Index zero gives the first character. This is like it works in C. Careful:
+text column numbers start with one! Example, to get the character under the
+cursor: >
+ :let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1]
+
+If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty
+String. A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards
+compatibility). Use [-1:] to get the last byte.
+
+If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1. See |list-index|
+for possible index values. If the index is out of range this results in an
+error. Example: >
+ :let item = mylist[-1] " get last item
+
+Generally, if a |List| index is equal to or higher than the length of the
+|List|, or more negative than the length of the |List|, this results in an
+error.
+
+
+expr8[expr1a : expr1b] substring or sublist *expr-[:]*
+
+If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes
+from expr1a to and including expr1b. expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and
+expr1b are used as a Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see
+|byteidx()| for computing the indexes.
+
+If expr1a is omitted zero is used. If expr1b is omitted the length of the
+string minus one is used.
+
+A negative number can be used to measure from the end of the string. -1 is
+the last character, -2 the last but one, etc.
+
+If an index goes out of range for the string characters are omitted. If
+expr1b is smaller than expr1a the result is an empty string.
+
+Examples: >
+ :let c = name[-1:] " last byte of a string
+ :let c = name[-2:-2] " last but one byte of a string
+ :let s = line(".")[4:] " from the fifth byte to the end
+ :let s = s[:-3] " remove last two bytes
+<
+ *sublist* *slice*
+If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by
+the indexes expr1a and expr1b. This works like with a String, as explained
+just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error. Examples: >
+ :let l = mylist[:3] " first four items
+ :let l = mylist[4:4] " List with one item
+ :let l = mylist[:] " shallow copy of a List
+
+Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an
+error.
+
+
+expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| *expr-entry*
+
+If expr8 is a |Dictionary| and it is followed by a dot, then the following
+name will be used as a key in the |Dictionary|. This is just like:
+expr8[name].
+
+The name must consist of alphanumeric characters, just like a variable name,
+but it may start with a number. Curly braces cannot be used.
+
+There must not be white space before or after the dot.
+
+Examples: >
+ :let dict = {"one": 1, 2: "two"}
+ :echo dict.one
+ :echo dict .2
+
+Note that the dot is also used for String concatenation. To avoid confusion
+always put spaces around the dot for String concatenation.
+
+
+expr8(expr1, ...) |Funcref| function call
+
+When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to.
+
+
+
+ *expr9*
+number
+------
+number number constant *expr-number*
+
+Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), or Octal (starting with 0).
+
+ *floating-point-format*
+Floating point numbers can be written in two forms:
+
+ [-+]{N}.{M}
+ [-+]{N}.{M}e[-+]{exp}
+
+{N} and {M} are numbers. Both {N} and {M} must be present and can only
+contain digits.
+[-+] means there is an optional plus or minus sign.
+{exp} is the exponent, power of 10.
+Only a decimal point is accepted, not a comma. No matter what the current
+locale is.
+{only when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+Examples:
+ 123.456
+ +0.0001
+ 55.0
+ -0.123
+ 1.234e03
+ 1.0E-6
+ -3.1416e+88
+
+These are INVALID:
+ 3. empty {M}
+ 1e40 missing .{M}
+
+ *float-pi* *float-e*
+A few useful values to copy&paste: >
+ :let pi = 3.14159265359
+ :let e = 2.71828182846
+
+Rationale:
+Before floating point was introduced, the text "123.456" was interpreted as
+the two numbers "123" and "456", both converted to a string and concatenated,
+resulting in the string "123456". Since this was considered pointless, and we
+could not find it intentionally being used in Vim scripts, this backwards
+incompatibility was accepted in favor of being able to use the normal notation
+for floating point numbers.
+
+ *floating-point-precision*
+The precision and range of floating points numbers depends on what "double"
+means in the library Vim was compiled with. There is no way to change this at
+runtime.
+
+The default for displaying a |Float| is to use 6 decimal places, like using
+printf("%g", f). You can select something else when using the |printf()|
+function. Example: >
+ :echo printf('%.15e', atan(1))
+< 7.853981633974483e-01
+
+
+
+string *expr-string* *E114*
+------
+"string" string constant *expr-quote*
+
+Note that double quotes are used.
+
+A string constant accepts these special characters:
+\... three-digit octal number (e.g., "\316")
+\.. two-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
+\. one-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit)
+\x.. byte specified with two hex numbers (e.g., "\x1f")
+\x. byte specified with one hex number (must be followed by non-hex char)
+\X.. same as \x..
+\X. same as \x.
+\u.... character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the
+ current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4")
+\U.... same as \u....
+\b backspace <BS>
+\e escape <Esc>
+\f formfeed <FF>
+\n newline <NL>
+\r return <CR>
+\t tab <Tab>
+\\ backslash
+\" double quote
+\<xxx> Special key named "xxx". e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W. This is for use
+ in mappings, the 0x80 byte is escaped. Don't use <Char-xxxx> to get a
+ utf-8 character, use \uxxxx as mentioned above.
+
+Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some
+encodings. Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value
+of 'encoding'.
+
+Note that "\000" and "\x00" force the end of the string.
+
+
+literal-string *literal-string* *E115*
+---------------
+'string' string constant *expr-'*
+
+Note that single quotes are used.
+
+This string is taken as it is. No backslashes are removed or have a special
+meaning. The only exception is that two quotes stand for one quote.
+
+Single quoted strings are useful for patterns, so that backslashes do not need
+to be doubled. These two commands are equivalent: >
+ if a =~ "\\s*"
+ if a =~ '\s*'
+
+
+option *expr-option* *E112* *E113*
+------
+&option option value, local value if possible
+&g:option global option value
+&l:option local option value
+
+Examples: >
+ echo "tabstop is " . &tabstop
+ if &insertmode
+
+Any option name can be used here. See |options|. When using the local value
+and there is no buffer-local or window-local value, the global value is used
+anyway.
+
+
+register *expr-register* *@r*
+--------
+@r contents of register 'r'
+
+The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string.
+Newlines are inserted where required. To get the contents of the unnamed
+register use @" or @@. See |registers| for an explanation of the available
+registers.
+
+When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it
+evaluates to. Use |eval()| to evaluate it.
+
+
+nesting *expr-nesting* *E110*
+-------
+(expr1) nested expression
+
+
+environment variable *expr-env*
+--------------------
+$VAR environment variable
+
+The String value of any environment variable. When it is not defined, the
+result is an empty string.
+ *expr-env-expand*
+Note that there is a difference between using $VAR directly and using
+expand("$VAR"). Using it directly will only expand environment variables that
+are known inside the current Vim session. Using expand() will first try using
+the environment variables known inside the current Vim session. If that
+fails, a shell will be used to expand the variable. This can be slow, but it
+does expand all variables that the shell knows about. Example: >
+ :echo $version
+ :echo expand("$version")
+The first one probably doesn't echo anything, the second echoes the $version
+variable (if your shell supports it).
+
+
+internal variable *expr-variable*
+-----------------
+variable internal variable
+See below |internal-variables|.
+
+
+function call *expr-function* *E116* *E118* *E119* *E120*
+-------------
+function(expr1, ...) function call
+See below |functions|.
+
+
+==============================================================================
+3. Internal variable *internal-variables* *E461*
+
+An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'. But it
+cannot start with a digit. It's also possible to use curly braces, see
+|curly-braces-names|.
+
+An internal variable is created with the ":let" command |:let|.
+An internal variable is explicitly destroyed with the ":unlet" command
+|:unlet|.
+Using a name that is not an internal variable or refers to a variable that has
+been destroyed results in an error.
+
+There are several name spaces for variables. Which one is to be used is
+specified by what is prepended:
+
+ (nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global
+|buffer-variable| b: Local to the current buffer.
+|window-variable| w: Local to the current window.
+|tabpage-variable| t: Local to the current tab page.
+|global-variable| g: Global.
+|local-variable| l: Local to a function.
+|script-variable| s: Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script.
+|function-argument| a: Function argument (only inside a function).
+|vim-variable| v: Global, predefined by Vim.
+
+The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|. For example, to
+delete all script-local variables: >
+ :for k in keys(s:)
+ : unlet s:[k]
+ :endfor
+<
+ *buffer-variable* *b:var*
+A variable name that is preceded with "b:" is local to the current buffer.
+Thus you can have several "b:foo" variables, one for each buffer.
+This kind of variable is deleted when the buffer is wiped out or deleted with
+|:bdelete|.
+
+One local buffer variable is predefined:
+ *b:changedtick-variable* *changetick*
+b:changedtick The total number of changes to the current buffer. It is
+ incremented for each change. An undo command is also a change
+ in this case. This can be used to perform an action only when
+ the buffer has changed. Example: >
+ :if my_changedtick != b:changedtick
+ : let my_changedtick = b:changedtick
+ : call My_Update()
+ :endif
+<
+ *window-variable* *w:var*
+A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window. It
+is deleted when the window is closed.
+
+ *tabpage-variable* *t:var*
+A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page,
+It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled
+without the |+windows| feature}
+
+ *global-variable* *g:var*
+Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:". Omitting this will
+access a variable local to a function. But "g:" can also be used in any other
+place if you like.
+
+ *local-variable* *l:var*
+Inside functions local variables are accessed without prepending anything.
+But you can also prepend "l:" if you like. However, without prepending "l:"
+you may run into reserved variable names. For example "count". By itself it
+refers to "v:count". Using "l:count" you can have a local variable with the
+same name.
+
+ *script-variable* *s:var*
+In a Vim script variables starting with "s:" can be used. They cannot be
+accessed from outside of the scripts, thus are local to the script.
+
+They can be used in:
+- commands executed while the script is sourced
+- functions defined in the script
+- autocommands defined in the script
+- functions and autocommands defined in functions and autocommands which were
+ defined in the script (recursively)
+- user defined commands defined in the script
+Thus not in:
+- other scripts sourced from this one
+- mappings
+- menus
+- etc.
+
+Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names.
+Take this example: >
+
+ let s:counter = 0
+ function MyCounter()
+ let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+ echo s:counter
+ endfunction
+ command Tick call MyCounter()
+
+You can now invoke "Tick" from any script, and the "s:counter" variable in
+that script will not be changed, only the "s:counter" in the script where
+"Tick" was defined is used.
+
+Another example that does the same: >
+
+ let s:counter = 0
+ command Tick let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | echo s:counter
+
+When calling a function and invoking a user-defined command, the context for
+script variables is set to the script where the function or command was
+defined.
+
+The script variables are also available when a function is defined inside a
+function that is defined in a script. Example: >
+
+ let s:counter = 0
+ function StartCounting(incr)
+ if a:incr
+ function MyCounter()
+ let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+ endfunction
+ else
+ function MyCounter()
+ let s:counter = s:counter - 1
+ endfunction
+ endif
+ endfunction
+
+This defines the MyCounter() function either for counting up or counting down
+when calling StartCounting(). It doesn't matter from where StartCounting() is
+called, the s:counter variable will be accessible in MyCounter().
+
+When the same script is sourced again it will use the same script variables.
+They will remain valid as long as Vim is running. This can be used to
+maintain a counter: >
+
+ if !exists("s:counter")
+ let s:counter = 1
+ echo "script executed for the first time"
+ else
+ let s:counter = s:counter + 1
+ echo "script executed " . s:counter . " times now"
+ endif
+
+Note that this means that filetype plugins don't get a different set of script
+variables for each buffer. Use local buffer variables instead |b:var|.
+
+
+Predefined Vim variables: *vim-variable* *v:var*
+
+ *v:beval_col* *beval_col-variable*
+v:beval_col The number of the column, over which the mouse pointer is.
+ This is the byte index in the |v:beval_lnum| line.
+ Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+ *v:beval_bufnr* *beval_bufnr-variable*
+v:beval_bufnr The number of the buffer, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+ valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+ *v:beval_lnum* *beval_lnum-variable*
+v:beval_lnum The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+ valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+ *v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable*
+v:beval_text The text under or after the mouse pointer. Usually a word as
+ it is useful for debugging a C program. 'iskeyword' applies,
+ but a dot and "->" before the position is included. When on a
+ ']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and
+ word before it. When on a Visual area within one line the
+ highlighted text is used.
+ Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+ *v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable*
+v:beval_winnr The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only
+ valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option.
+
+ *v:char* *char-variable*
+v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed
+ character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |:map-<expr>|.
+
+ *v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable*
+v:charconvert_from
+ The name of the character encoding of a file to be converted.
+ Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
+
+ *v:charconvert_to* *charconvert_to-variable*
+v:charconvert_to
+ The name of the character encoding of a file after conversion.
+ Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option.
+
+ *v:cmdarg* *cmdarg-variable*
+v:cmdarg This variable is used for two purposes:
+ 1. The extra arguments given to a file read/write command.
+ Currently these are "++enc=" and "++ff=". This variable is
+ set before an autocommand event for a file read/write
+ command is triggered. There is a leading space to make it
+ possible to append this variable directly after the
+ read/write command. Note: The "+cmd" argument isn't
+ included here, because it will be executed anyway.
+ 2. When printing a PostScript file with ":hardcopy" this is
+ the argument for the ":hardcopy" command. This can be used
+ in 'printexpr'.
+
+ *v:cmdbang* *cmdbang-variable*
+v:cmdbang Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command. When a "!"
+ was used the value is 1, otherwise it is 0. Note that this
+ can only be used in autocommands. For user commands |<bang>|
+ can be used.
+
+ *v:count* *count-variable*
+v:count The count given for the last Normal mode command. Can be used
+ to get the count before a mapping. Read-only. Example: >
+ :map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR>
+< Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you
+ get when typing ':' after a count.
+ When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied,
+ just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example.
+ Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option.
+ "count" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+ *v:count1* *count1-variable*
+v:count1 Just like "v:count", but defaults to one when no count is
+ used.
+
+ *v:ctype* *ctype-variable*
+v:ctype The current locale setting for characters of the runtime
+ environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+ current locale encoding. Technical: it's the value of
+ LC_CTYPE. When not using a locale the value is "C".
+ This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+ command.
+ See |multi-lang|.
+
+ *v:dying* *dying-variable*
+v:dying Normally zero. When a deadly signal is caught it's set to
+ one. When multiple signals are caught the number increases.
+ Can be used in an autocommand to check if Vim didn't
+ terminate normally. {only works on Unix}
+ Example: >
+ :au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif
+< Note: if another deadly signal is caught when v:dying is one,
+ VimLeave autocommands will not be executed.
+
+ *v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable*
+v:errmsg Last given error message. It's allowed to set this variable.
+ Example: >
+ :let v:errmsg = ""
+ :silent! next
+ :if v:errmsg != ""
+ : ... handle error
+< "errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+ *v:exception* *exception-variable*
+v:exception The value of the exception most recently caught and not
+ finished. See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|.
+ Example: >
+ :try
+ : throw "oops"
+ :catch /.*/
+ : echo "caught" v:exception
+ :endtry
+< Output: "caught oops".
+
+ *v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable*
+v:fcs_reason The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered.
+ Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what
+ to set v:fcs_choice to. Possible values:
+ deleted file no longer exists
+ conflict file contents, mode or timestamp was
+ changed and buffer is modified
+ changed file contents has changed
+ mode mode of file changed
+ time only file timestamp changed
+
+ *v:fcs_choice* *fcs_choice-variable*
+v:fcs_choice What should happen after a |FileChangedShell| event was
+ triggered. Can be used in an autocommand to tell Vim what to
+ do with the affected buffer:
+ reload Reload the buffer (does not work if
+ the file was deleted).
+ ask Ask the user what to do, as if there
+ was no autocommand. Except that when
+ only the timestamp changed nothing
+ will happen.
+ <empty> Nothing, the autocommand should do
+ everything that needs to be done.
+ The default is empty. If another (invalid) value is used then
+ Vim behaves like it is empty, there is no warning message.
+
+ *v:fname_in* *fname_in-variable*
+v:fname_in The name of the input file. Valid while evaluating:
+ option used for ~
+ 'charconvert' file to be converted
+ 'diffexpr' original file
+ 'patchexpr' original file
+ 'printexpr' file to be printed
+ And set to the swap file name for |SwapExists|.
+
+ *v:fname_out* *fname_out-variable*
+v:fname_out The name of the output file. Only valid while
+ evaluating:
+ option used for ~
+ 'charconvert' resulting converted file (*)
+ 'diffexpr' output of diff
+ 'patchexpr' resulting patched file
+ (*) When doing conversion for a write command (e.g., ":w
+ file") it will be equal to v:fname_in. When doing conversion
+ for a read command (e.g., ":e file") it will be a temporary
+ file and different from v:fname_in.
+
+ *v:fname_new* *fname_new-variable*
+v:fname_new The name of the new version of the file. Only valid while
+ evaluating 'diffexpr'.
+
+ *v:fname_diff* *fname_diff-variable*
+v:fname_diff The name of the diff (patch) file. Only valid while
+ evaluating 'patchexpr'.
+
+ *v:folddashes* *folddashes-variable*
+v:folddashes Used for 'foldtext': dashes representing foldlevel of a closed
+ fold.
+ Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+ *v:foldlevel* *foldlevel-variable*
+v:foldlevel Used for 'foldtext': foldlevel of closed fold.
+ Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+ *v:foldend* *foldend-variable*
+v:foldend Used for 'foldtext': last line of closed fold.
+ Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+ *v:foldstart* *foldstart-variable*
+v:foldstart Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold.
+ Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext|
+
+ *v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable*
+v:insertmode Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand
+ events. Values:
+ i Insert mode
+ r Replace mode
+ v Virtual Replace mode
+
+ *v:key* *key-variable*
+v:key Key of the current item of a |Dictionary|. Only valid while
+ evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |filter()|.
+ Read-only.
+
+ *v:lang* *lang-variable*
+v:lang The current locale setting for messages of the runtime
+ environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+ current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_MESSAGES.
+ The value is system dependent.
+ This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+ command.
+ It can be different from |v:ctype| when messages are desired
+ in a different language than what is used for character
+ encoding. See |multi-lang|.
+
+ *v:lc_time* *lc_time-variable*
+v:lc_time The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime
+ environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the
+ current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_TIME.
+ This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language|
+ command. See |multi-lang|.
+
+ *v:lnum* *lnum-variable*
+v:lnum Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr|, 'formatexpr' and
+ 'indentexpr' expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel'
+ and 'guitabtooltip'. Only valid while one of these
+ expressions is being evaluated. Read-only when in the
+ |sandbox|.
+
+ *v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable*
+v:mouse_win Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+ First window has number 1, like with |winnr()|. The value is
+ zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+ *v:mouse_lnum* *mouse_lnum-variable*
+v:mouse_lnum Line number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+ This is the text line number, not the screen line number. The
+ value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+ *v:mouse_col* *mouse_col-variable*
+v:mouse_col Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|.
+ This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|. The
+ value is zero when there was no mouse button click.
+
+ *v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable*
+v:oldfiles List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on
+ startup. These are the files that Vim remembers marks for.
+ The length of the List is limited by the ' argument of the
+ 'viminfo' option (default is 100).
+ Also see |:oldfiles| and |c_#<|.
+ The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is
+ stored in the |viminfo| file later. If you use values other
+ than String this will cause trouble.
+ {only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature}
+
+ *v:operator* *operator-variable*
+v:operator The last operator given in Normal mode. This is a single
+ character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>,
+ in which case it is two characters. Best used alongside
+ |v:prevcount| and |v:register|. Useful if you want to cancel
+ Operator-pending mode and then use the operator, e.g.: >
+ :omap O <Esc>:call MyMotion(v:operator)<CR>
+< The value remains set until another operator is entered, thus
+ don't expect it to be empty.
+ v:operator is not set for |:delete|, |:yank| or other Ex
+ commands.
+ Read-only.
+
+ *v:prevcount* *prevcount-variable*
+v:prevcount The count given for the last but one Normal mode command.
+ This is the v:count value of the previous command. Useful if
+ you want to cancel Visual or Operator-pending mode and then
+ use the count, e.g.: >
+ :vmap % <Esc>:call MyFilter(v:prevcount)<CR>
+< Read-only.
+
+ *v:profiling* *profiling-variable*
+v:profiling Normally zero. Set to one after using ":profile start".
+ See |profiling|.
+
+ *v:progname* *progname-variable*
+v:progname Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was
+ invoked. Allows you to do special initialisations for "view",
+ "evim" etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim.
+ Read-only.
+
+ *v:register* *register-variable*
+v:register The name of the register supplied to the last normal mode
+ command. Empty if none were supplied. |getreg()| |setreg()|
+
+ *v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable*
+v:scrollstart String describing the script or function that caused the
+ screen to scroll up. It's only set when it is empty, thus the
+ first reason is remembered. It is set to "Unknown" for a
+ typed command.
+ This can be used to find out why your script causes the
+ hit-enter prompt.
+
+ *v:servername* *servername-variable*
+v:servername The resulting registered |x11-clientserver| name if any.
+ Read-only.
+
+
+v:searchforward *v:searchforward* *searchforward-variable*
+ Search direction: 1 after a forward search, 0 after a
+ backward search. It is reset to forward when directly setting
+ the last search pattern, see |quote/|.
+ Note that the value is restored when returning from a
+ function. |function-search-undo|.
+ Read-write.
+
+ *v:shell_error* *shell_error-variable*
+v:shell_error Result of the last shell command. When non-zero, the last
+ shell command had an error. When zero, there was no problem.
+ This only works when the shell returns the error code to Vim.
+ The value -1 is often used when the command could not be
+ executed. Read-only.
+ Example: >
+ :!mv foo bar
+ :if v:shell_error
+ : echo 'could not rename "foo" to "bar"!'
+ :endif
+< "shell_error" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+ *v:statusmsg* *statusmsg-variable*
+v:statusmsg Last given status message. It's allowed to set this variable.
+
+ *v:swapname* *swapname-variable*
+v:swapname Only valid when executing |SwapExists| autocommands: Name of
+ the swap file found. Read-only.
+
+ *v:swapchoice* *swapchoice-variable*
+v:swapchoice |SwapExists| autocommands can set this to the selected choice
+ for handling an existing swap file:
+ 'o' Open read-only
+ 'e' Edit anyway
+ 'r' Recover
+ 'd' Delete swapfile
+ 'q' Quit
+ 'a' Abort
+ The value should be a single-character string. An empty value
+ results in the user being asked, as would happen when there is
+ no SwapExists autocommand. The default is empty.
+
+ *v:swapcommand* *swapcommand-variable*
+v:swapcommand Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been
+ opened. Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have
+ another Vim open the file and jump to the right place. For
+ example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r".
+ For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r".
+
+ *v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable*
+v:termresponse The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV|
+ termcap entry. It is set when Vim receives an escape sequence
+ that starts with ESC [ or CSI and ends in a 'c', with only
+ digits, ';' and '.' in between.
+ When this option is set, the TermResponse autocommand event is
+ fired, so that you can react to the response from the
+ terminal.
+ The response from a new xterm is: "<Esc>[ Pp ; Pv ; Pc c". Pp
+ is the terminal type: 0 for vt100 and 1 for vt220. Pv is the
+ patch level (since this was introduced in patch 95, it's
+ always 95 or bigger). Pc is always zero.
+ {only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature}
+
+ *v:this_session* *this_session-variable*
+v:this_session Full filename of the last loaded or saved session file. See
+ |:mksession|. It is allowed to set this variable. When no
+ session file has been saved, this variable is empty.
+ "this_session" also works, for backwards compatibility.
+
+ *v:throwpoint* *throwpoint-variable*
+v:throwpoint The point where the exception most recently caught and not
+ finished was thrown. Not set when commands are typed. See
+ also |v:exception| and |throw-variables|.
+ Example: >
+ :try
+ : throw "oops"
+ :catch /.*/
+ : echo "Exception from" v:throwpoint
+ :endtry
+< Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2"
+
+ *v:val* *val-variable*
+v:val Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|. Only
+ valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and
+ |filter()|. Read-only.
+
+ *v:version* *version-variable*
+v:version Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus
+ minor version number. Version 5.0 is 500. Version 5.1 (5.01)
+ is 501. Read-only. "version" also works, for backwards
+ compatibility.
+ Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: >
+ if has("patch123")
+< Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both
+ version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are
+ completely different.
+
+ *v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable*
+v:warningmsg Last given warning message. It's allowed to set this variable.
+
+ *v:windowid* *windowid-variable*
+v:windowid When any X11 based GUI is running or when running in a
+ terminal and Vim connects to the X server (|-X|) this will be
+ set to the window ID.
+ When an MS-Windows GUI is running this will be set to the
+ window handle.
+ Otherwise the value is zero.
+ Note: for windows inside Vim use |winnr()|.
+
+==============================================================================
+4. Builtin Functions *functions*
+
+See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for.
+
+(Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.)
+
+USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~
+
+abs( {expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr}
+acos( {expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr}
+add( {list}, {item}) List append {item} to |List| {list}
+append( {lnum}, {string}) Number append {string} below line {lnum}
+append( {lnum}, {list}) Number append lines {list} below line {lnum}
+argc() Number number of files in the argument list
+argidx() Number current index in the argument list
+argv( {nr}) String {nr} entry of the argument list
+argv( ) List the argument list
+asin( {expr}) Float arc sine of {expr}
+atan( {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr}
+atan2( {expr}, {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}
+browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+ String put up a file requester
+browsedir( {title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester
+bufexists( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} exists
+buflisted( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is listed
+bufloaded( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is loaded
+bufname( {expr}) String Name of the buffer {expr}
+bufnr( {expr}) Number Number of the buffer {expr}
+bufwinnr( {expr}) Number window number of buffer {expr}
+byte2line( {byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte}
+byteidx( {expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr}
+call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}])
+ any call {func} with arguments {arglist}
+ceil( {expr}) Float round {expr} up
+changenr() Number current change number
+char2nr( {expr}) Number ASCII value of first char in {expr}
+cindent( {lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum}
+clearmatches() none clear all matches
+col( {expr}) Number column nr of cursor or mark
+complete( {startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion
+complete_add( {expr}) Number add completion match
+complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion
+confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+ Number number of choice picked by user
+copy( {expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr}
+cos( {expr}) Float cosine of {expr}
+cosh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr}
+count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
+ Number count how many {expr} are in {list}
+cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+ Number checks existence of cscope connection
+cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}])
+ Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd}
+cursor( {list}) Number move cursor to position in {list}
+deepcopy( {expr}) any make a full copy of {expr}
+delete( {fname}) Number delete file {fname}
+did_filetype() Number TRUE if FileType autocommand event used
+diff_filler( {lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum}
+diff_hlID( {lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col}
+empty( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is empty
+escape( {string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\'
+eval( {string}) any evaluate {string} into its value
+eventhandler( ) Number TRUE if inside an event handler
+executable( {expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists
+exists( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} exists
+extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}])
+ List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1}
+exp( {expr}) Float exponential of {expr}
+expand( {expr} [, {flag}]) String expand special keywords in {expr}
+feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer
+filereadable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a readable file
+filewritable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a writable file
+filter( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict remove items from {expr} where
+ {string} is 0
+finddir( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
+ String find directory {name} in {path}
+findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]])
+ String find file {name} in {path}
+float2nr( {expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number
+floor( {expr}) Float round {expr} down
+fmod( {expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}
+fnameescape( {fname}) String escape special characters in {fname}
+fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods}) String modify file name
+foldclosed( {lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldclosedend( {lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed
+foldlevel( {lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum}
+foldtext( ) String line displayed for closed fold
+foldtextresult( {lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum}
+foreground( ) Number bring the Vim window to the foreground
+function( {name}) Funcref reference to function {name}
+garbagecollect( [at_exit]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references
+get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def}
+get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def}
+getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+ List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr}
+getbufvar( {expr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in buffer {expr}
+getchar( [expr]) Number get one character from the user
+getcharmod( ) Number modifiers for the last typed character
+getcmdline() String return the current command-line
+getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line
+getcmdtype() String return the current command-line type
+getcwd() String the current working directory
+getfperm( {fname}) String file permissions of file {fname}
+getfsize( {fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname}
+getfontname( [{name}]) String name of font being used
+getftime( {fname}) Number last modification time of file
+getftype( {fname}) String description of type of file {fname}
+getline( {lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer
+getline( {lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer
+getloclist( {nr}) List list of location list items
+getmatches() List list of current matches
+getpid() Number process ID of Vim
+getpos( {expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc.
+getqflist() List list of quickfix items
+getreg( [{regname} [, 1]]) String contents of register
+getregtype( [{regname}]) String type of register
+gettabvar( {nr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in tab {nr}
+gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name})
+ any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}
+getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
+getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window
+getwinvar( {nr}, {varname}) any variable {varname} in window {nr}
+glob( {expr} [, {flag}]) String expand file wildcards in {expr}
+globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}])
+ String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path}
+has( {feature}) Number TRUE if feature {feature} supported
+has_key( {dict}, {key}) Number TRUE if {dict} has entry {key}
+haslocaldir() Number TRUE if current window executed |:lcd|
+hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+ Number TRUE if mapping to {what} exists
+histadd( {history},{item}) String add an item to a history
+histdel( {history} [, {item}]) String remove an item from a history
+histget( {history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history
+histnr( {history}) Number highest index of a history
+hlexists( {name}) Number TRUE if highlight group {name} exists
+hlID( {name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name}
+hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on
+iconv( {expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr}
+indent( {lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum}
+index( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]])
+ Number index in {list} where {expr} appears
+input( {prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]])
+ String get input from the user
+inputdialog( {p} [, {t} [, {c}]]) String like input() but in a GUI dialog
+inputlist( {textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list
+inputrestore() Number restore typeahead
+inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead
+inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text
+insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}]
+isdirectory( {directory}) Number TRUE if {directory} is a directory
+islocked( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is locked
+items( {dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict}
+join( {list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String
+keys( {dict}) List keys in {dict}
+len( {expr}) Number the length of {expr}
+libcall( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg}
+libcallnr( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number
+line( {expr}) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark
+line2byte( {lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum}
+lispindent( {lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum}
+localtime() Number current time
+log( {expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr}
+log10( {expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10
+map( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict change each item in {expr} to {expr}
+maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]])
+ String rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode}
+mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]])
+ String check for mappings matching {name}
+match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
+ Number position where {pat} matches in {expr}
+matchadd( {group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
+ Number highlight {pattern} with {group}
+matcharg( {nr}) List arguments of |:match|
+matchdelete( {id}) Number delete match identified by {id}
+matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
+ Number position where {pat} ends in {expr}
+matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
+ List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr}
+matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]])
+ String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr}
+max( {list}) Number maximum value of items in {list}
+min( {list}) Number minimum value of items in {list}
+mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+ Number create directory {name}
+mode( [expr]) String current editing mode
+mzeval( {expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression
+nextnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum}
+nr2char( {expr}) String single char with ASCII value {expr}
+pathshorten( {expr}) String shorten directory names in a path
+pow( {x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y}
+prevnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum}
+printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text
+pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible
+range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]])
+ List items from {expr} to {max}
+readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
+ List get list of lines from file {fname}
+reltime( [{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value
+reltimestr( {time}) String turn time value into a String
+remote_expr( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+ String send expression
+remote_foreground( {server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground
+remote_peek( {serverid} [, {retvar}])
+ Number check for reply string
+remote_read( {serverid}) String read reply string
+remote_send( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+ String send key sequence
+remove( {list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any remove items {idx}-{end} from {list}
+remove( {dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict}
+rename( {from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to}
+repeat( {expr}, {count}) String repeat {expr} {count} times
+resolve( {filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to
+reverse( {list}) List reverse {list} in-place
+round( {expr}) Float round off {expr}
+search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
+ Number search for {pattern}
+searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]])
+ Number search for variable declaration
+searchpair( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+ Number search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpairpos( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]])
+ List search for other end of start/end pair
+searchpos( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]])
+ List search for {pattern}
+server2client( {clientid}, {string})
+ Number send reply string
+serverlist() String get a list of available servers
+setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val}
+setcmdpos( {pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line
+setline( {lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line}
+setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}])
+ Number modify location list using {list}
+setmatches( {list}) Number restore a list of matches
+setpos( {expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list}
+setqflist( {list}[, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list}
+setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type
+settabvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val}
+settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window
+ {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val}
+setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window {nr} to {val}
+shellescape( {string} [, {special}])
+ String escape {string} for use as shell
+ command argument
+simplify( {filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible
+sin( {expr}) Float sine of {expr}
+sinh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr}
+sort( {list} [, {func}]) List sort {list}, using {func} to compare
+soundfold( {word}) String sound-fold {word}
+spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor
+spellsuggest( {word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+ List spelling suggestions
+split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]])
+ List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr}
+sqrt( {expr} Float squar root of {expr}
+str2float( {expr}) Float convert String to Float
+str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) Number convert String to Number
+strchars( {expr}) Number character length of the String {expr}
+strdisplaywidth( {expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr}
+strftime( {format}[, {time}]) String time in specified format
+stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}])
+ Number index of {needle} in {haystack}
+string( {expr}) String String representation of {expr} value
+strlen( {expr}) Number length of the String {expr}
+strpart( {src}, {start}[, {len}])
+ String {len} characters of {src} at {start}
+strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}])
+ Number last index of {needle} in {haystack}
+strtrans( {expr}) String translate string to make it printable
+strwidth( {expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr}
+submatch( {nr}) String specific match in ":substitute"
+substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags})
+ String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub}
+synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col}
+synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}])
+ String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID}
+synIDtrans( {synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID}
+synconcealed( {lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing
+synstack( {lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col}
+system( {expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr}
+tabpagebuflist( [{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page
+tabpagenr( [{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page
+tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}])
+ Number number of current window in tab page
+taglist( {expr}) List list of tags matching {expr}
+tagfiles() List tags files used
+tempname() String name for a temporary file
+tan( {expr}) Float tangent of {expr}
+tanh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr}
+tolower( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase
+toupper( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase
+tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr}
+ to chars in {tostr}
+trunc( {expr} Float truncate Float {expr}
+type( {name}) Number type of variable {name}
+undofile( {name}) String undo file name for {name}
+undotree() List undo file tree
+values( {dict}) List values in {dict}
+virtcol( {expr}) Number screen column of cursor or mark
+visualmode( [expr]) String last visual mode used
+winbufnr( {nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr}
+wincol() Number window column of the cursor
+winheight( {nr}) Number height of window {nr}
+winline() Number window line of the cursor
+winnr( [{expr}]) Number number of current window
+winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes
+winrestview( {dict}) none restore view of current window
+winsaveview() Dict save view of current window
+winwidth( {nr}) Number width of window {nr}
+writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
+ Number write list of lines to file {fname}
+
+abs({expr}) *abs()*
+ Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to
+ a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be
+ converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise
+ abs() gives an error message and returns -1.
+ Examples: >
+ echo abs(1.456)
+< 1.456 >
+ echo abs(-5.456)
+< 5.456 >
+ echo abs(-4)
+< 4
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+acos({expr}) *acos()*
+ Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a
+ |Float| in the range of [0, pi].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+ [-1, 1].
+ Examples: >
+ :echo acos(0)
+< 1.570796 >
+ :echo acos(-0.5)
+< 2.094395
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+add({list}, {expr}) *add()*
+ Append the item {expr} to |List| {list}. Returns the
+ resulting |List|. Examples: >
+ :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item)
+ :call add(mylist, "woodstock")
+< Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single
+ item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+ Use |insert()| to add an item at another position.
+
+
+append({lnum}, {expr}) *append()*
+ When {expr} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a
+ text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer.
+ Otherwise append {expr} as one text line below line {lnum} in
+ the current buffer.
+ {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one.
+ Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory),
+ 0 for success. Example: >
+ :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END")
+ :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"])
+<
+ *argc()*
+argc() The result is the number of files in the argument list of the
+ current window. See |arglist|.
+
+ *argidx()*
+argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is
+ the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|.
+
+ *argv()*
+argv([{nr}]) The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the
+ current window. See |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one.
+ Example: >
+ :let i = 0
+ :while i < argc()
+ : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.')
+ : exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>'
+ : let i = i + 1
+ :endwhile
+< Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is
+ returned.
+
+asin({expr}) *asin()*
+ Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float|
+ in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+ [-1, 1].
+ Examples: >
+ :echo asin(0.8)
+< 0.927295 >
+ :echo asin(-0.5)
+< -0.523599
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+atan({expr}) *atan()*
+ Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in
+ the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo atan(100)
+< 1.560797 >
+ :echo atan(-4.01)
+< -1.326405
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()*
+ Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in
+ radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi].
+ {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo atan2(-1, 1)
+< -0.785398 >
+ :echo atan2(1, -1)
+< 2.356194
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+ *browse()*
+browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default})
+ Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")"
+ returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions).
+ The input fields are:
+ {save} when non-zero, select file to write
+ {title} title for the requester
+ {initdir} directory to start browsing in
+ {default} default file name
+ When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
+ browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
+
+ *browsedir()*
+browsedir({title}, {initdir})
+ Put up a directory requester. This only works when
+ "has("browse")" returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions).
+ On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file
+ browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory
+ to be used.
+ The input fields are:
+ {title} title for the requester
+ {initdir} directory to start browsing in
+ When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or
+ browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned.
+
+bufexists({expr}) *bufexists()*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
+ {expr} exists.
+ If the {expr} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used.
+ If the {expr} argument is a string it must match a buffer name
+ exactly. The name can be:
+ - Relative to the current directory.
+ - A full path.
+ - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile".
+ - A URL name.
+ Unlisted buffers will be found.
+ Note that help files are listed by their short name in the
+ output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their
+ long name to be able to find them.
+ bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name
+ with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp
+ for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1"
+ Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate
+ file name.
+ *buffer_exists()*
+ Obsolete name: buffer_exists().
+
+buflisted({expr}) *buflisted()*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
+ {expr} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set).
+ The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+bufloaded({expr}) *bufloaded()*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called
+ {expr} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden).
+ The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|.
+
+bufname({expr}) *bufname()*
+ The result is the name of a buffer, as it is displayed by the
+ ":ls" command.
+ If {expr} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given.
+ Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window.
+ If {expr} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match
+ with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is
+ set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one
+ match an empty string is returned.
+ "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the
+ alternate buffer.
+ A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end
+ or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a
+ full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the
+ pattern.
+ Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match
+ with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted
+ buffers are searched for.
+ If the {expr} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer
+ number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: >
+ :echo bufname("3" + 0)
+< If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty
+ string is returned. >
+ bufname("#") alternate buffer name
+ bufname(3) name of buffer 3
+ bufname("%") name of current buffer
+ bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches.
+< *buffer_name()*
+ Obsolete name: buffer_name().
+
+ *bufnr()*
+bufnr({expr} [, {create}])
+ The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by
+ the ":ls" command. For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()|
+ above.
+ If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the
+ {create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted,
+ buffer is created and its number is returned.
+ bufnr("$") is the last buffer: >
+ :let last_buffer = bufnr("$")
+< The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number
+ of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller
+ number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed
+ them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer.
+ *buffer_number()*
+ Obsolete name: buffer_number().
+ *last_buffer_nr()*
+ Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr().
+
+bufwinnr({expr}) *bufwinnr()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the number of the first
+ window associated with buffer {expr}. For the use of {expr},
+ see |bufname()| above. If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or
+ there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: >
+
+ echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1))
+
+< The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+ |:wincmd|.
+ Only deals with the current tab page.
+
+
+byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()*
+ Return the line number that contains the character at byte
+ count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the
+ end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option
+ for the current buffer. The first character has byte count
+ one.
+ Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+ {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset|
+ feature}
+
+byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()*
+ Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the string
+ {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it returns zero.
+ This function is only useful when there are multibyte
+ characters, otherwise the returned value is equal to {nr}.
+ Composing characters are counted as a separate character.
+ Example : >
+ echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3))
+< will display the fourth character. Another way to do the
+ same: >
+ let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3))
+ echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1))
+< If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned.
+ If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string
+ is returned.
+
+call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699*
+ Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as
+ arguments.
+ {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function.
+ a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line.
+ Returns the return value of the called function.
+ {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be
+ used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function|
+
+ceil({expr}) *ceil()*
+ Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to
+ {expr} as a |Float| (round up).
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ echo ceil(1.456)
+< 2.0 >
+ echo ceil(-5.456)
+< -5.0 >
+ echo ceil(4.0)
+< 4.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+changenr() *changenr()*
+ Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same
+ number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used
+ with the |:undo| command.
+ When a change was made it is the number of that change. After
+ redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is
+ one less than the number of the undone change.
+
+char2nr({expr}) *char2nr()*
+ Return number value of the first char in {expr}. Examples: >
+ char2nr(" ") returns 32
+ char2nr("ABC") returns 65
+< The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": >
+ char2nr("á") returns 225
+ char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195
+< |nr2char()| does the opposite.
+
+cindent({lnum}) *cindent()*
+ Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C
+ indenting rules, as with 'cindent'.
+ The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+ relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+ When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent|
+ feature, -1 is returned.
+ See |C-indenting|.
+
+clearmatches() *clearmatches()*
+ Clears all matches previously defined by |matchadd()| and the
+ |:match| commands.
+
+ *col()*
+col({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column
+ position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are:
+ . the cursor position
+ $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+ number of characters in the cursor line plus one)
+ 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+ returned)
+ Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line
+ and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get
+ the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is
+ out of range then col() returns zero.
+ To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use
+ |getpos()|.
+ For the screen column position use |virtcol()|.
+ Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+ Examples: >
+ col(".") column of cursor
+ col("$") length of cursor line plus one
+ col("'t") column of mark t
+ col("'" . markname) column of mark markname
+< The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error.
+ For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another
+ buffer.
+ For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the
+ column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the
+ line. This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: >
+ :imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR>
+ \<C-O>:set ve=all<CR>
+ \<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar>
+ \let &ve = save_ve<CR>
+<
+
+complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785*
+ Set the matches for Insert mode completion.
+ Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping
+ with CTRL-R = |i_CTRL-R|. It does not work after CTRL-O or
+ with an expression mapping.
+ {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed
+ text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text
+ that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an
+ empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a
+ match.
+ {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match.
+ See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible.
+ Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid
+ inserting anything that would cause completion to stop.
+ The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with
+ Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if
+ specified, see |ins-completion-menu|.
+ Example: >
+ inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR>
+
+ func! ListMonths()
+ call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March',
+ \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September',
+ \ 'October', 'November', 'December'])
+ return ''
+ endfunc
+< This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that
+ an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted.
+
+complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()*
+ Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the
+ function specified with the 'completefunc' option.
+ Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory),
+ 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in
+ the list.
+ See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is
+ the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return.
+
+complete_check() *complete_check()*
+ Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches.
+ This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time.
+ Returns non-zero when searching for matches is to be aborted,
+ zero otherwise.
+ Only to be used by the function specified with the
+ 'completefunc' option.
+
+ *confirm()*
+confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]])
+ Confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be
+ made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first
+ choice this is 1.
+ Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog
+ support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|.
+
+ {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the
+ alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is
+ used (and translated).
+ {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on
+ some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit.
+
+ {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated
+ by '\n', e.g. >
+ confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel")
+< The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice.
+ Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does
+ not need to be the first letter: >
+ confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All")
+< For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as
+ the default shortcut key.
+
+ The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice
+ that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first
+ choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If
+ {default} is omitted, 1 is used.
+
+ The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog. This
+ is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32
+ GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question",
+ "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first character is
+ relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used.
+
+ If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C,
+ or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0.
+
+ An example: >
+ :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2)
+ :if choice == 0
+ : echo "make up your mind!"
+ :elseif choice == 3
+ : echo "tasteful"
+ :else
+ : echo "I prefer bananas myself."
+ :endif
+< In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons
+ depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included,
+ the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm()
+ tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they
+ don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems
+ the horizontal layout is always used.
+
+ *copy()*
+copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+ different from using {expr} directly.
+ When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means
+ that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+ copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus
+ changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. Also
+ see |deepcopy()|.
+
+cos({expr}) *cos()*
+ Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo cos(100)
+< 0.862319 >
+ :echo cos(-4.01)
+< -0.646043
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+cosh({expr}) *cosh()*
+ Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+ [1, inf].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo cosh(0.5)
+< 1.127626 >
+ :echo cosh(-0.5)
+< -1.127626
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()*
+ Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears
+ in |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}.
+ If {start} is given then start with the item with this index.
+ {start} can only be used with a |List|.
+ When {ic} is given and it's non-zero then case is ignored.
+
+
+ *cscope_connection()*
+cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]])
+ Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no
+ parameters are specified, then the function returns:
+ 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or
+ if there are no cscope connections;
+ 1, if there is at least one cscope connection.
+
+ If parameters are specified, then the value of {num}
+ determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked:
+
+ {num} Description of existence check
+ ----- ------------------------------
+ 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()").
+ 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for
+ {dbpath}.
+ 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for
+ {dbpath}.
+ 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both
+ {dbpath} and {prepend}.
+ 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both
+ {dbpath} and {prepend}.
+
+ Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive!
+
+ Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): >
+
+ # pid database name prepend path
+ 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local
+<
+ Invocation Return Val ~
+ ---------- ---------- >
+ cscope_connection() 1
+ cscope_connection(1, "out") 1
+ cscope_connection(2, "out") 0
+ cscope_connection(3, "out") 0
+ cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1
+ cscope_connection(4, "out") 0
+ cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0
+ cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1
+<
+cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()*
+cursor({list})
+ Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the
+ line {lnum}. The first column is one.
+ When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List|
+ with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}. This is like
+ the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item.
+ Does not change the jumplist.
+ If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+ the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer.
+ If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line.
+ If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line,
+ the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the
+ line.
+ If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column.
+ When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in
+ screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a
+ position within a <Tab> or after the last character.
+ Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+
+
+deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698*
+ Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't
+ different from using {expr} directly.
+ When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means
+ that the original |List| can be changed without changing the
+ copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List|, a copy for it
+ is made, recursively. Thus changing an item in the copy does
+ not change the contents of the original |List|.
+ When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or
+ |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to
+ this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a
+ |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means
+ that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail.
+ *E724*
+ Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item
+ that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with
+ {noref} set to 1 will fail.
+ Also see |copy()|.
+
+delete({fname}) *delete()*
+ Deletes the file by the name {fname}. The result is a Number,
+ which is 0 if the file was deleted successfully, and non-zero
+ when the deletion failed.
+ Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|.
+
+ *did_filetype()*
+did_filetype() Returns non-zero when autocommands are being executed and the
+ FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used
+ to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts
+ that detect the file type. |FileType|
+ When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this
+ really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the
+ current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts
+ editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax
+ file.
+
+diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()*
+ Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}.
+ These are the lines that were inserted at this point in
+ another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the
+ display but don't exist in the buffer.
+ {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
+ line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+ Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode.
+
+diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()*
+ Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column
+ {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a
+ diff change zero is returned.
+ {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
+ line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+ {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+ line.
+ The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain
+ syntax information about the highlighting.
+
+empty({expr}) *empty()*
+ Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise.
+ A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any
+ items. A Number is empty when its value is zero.
+ For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the
+ length with zero.
+
+escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()*
+ Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a
+ backslash. Example: >
+ :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \')
+< results in: >
+ c:\\program\ files\\vim
+< Also see |shellescape()|.
+
+ *eval()*
+eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to
+ turn the result of |string()| back into the original value.
+ This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings and composites of
+ them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing
+ functions.
+
+eventhandler() *eventhandler()*
+ Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got
+ interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character,
+ e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive
+ commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned.
+
+executable({expr}) *executable()*
+ This function checks if an executable with the name {expr}
+ exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any
+ arguments.
+ executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal
+ searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT*
+ On MS-DOS and MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can
+ optionally be included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are
+ tried. Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be
+ found. If $PATHEXT is not set then ".exe;.com;.bat;.cmd" is
+ used. A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using
+ the name without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a
+ Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an
+ extension.
+ On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and
+ is not a directory, not if it's really executable.
+ On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is
+ always found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it
+ should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|.
+ The result is a Number:
+ 1 exists
+ 0 does not exist
+ -1 not implemented on this system
+
+ *exists()*
+exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is
+ defined, zero otherwise. The {expr} argument is a string,
+ which contains one of these:
+ &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists,
+ not if it really works)
+ +option-name Vim option that works.
+ $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be
+ done by comparing with an empty
+ string)
+ *funcname built-in function (see |functions|)
+ or user defined function (see
+ |user-functions|).
+ varname internal variable (see
+ |internal-variables|). Also works
+ for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary|
+ entries, |List| items, etc. Beware
+ that evaluating an index may cause an
+ error message for an invalid
+ expression. E.g.: >
+ :let l = [1, 2, 3]
+ :echo exists("l[5]")
+< 0 >
+ :echo exists("l[xx]")
+< E121: Undefined variable: xx
+ 0
+ :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user
+ command or command modifier |:command|.
+ Returns:
+ 1 for match with start of a command
+ 2 full match with a command
+ 3 matches several user commands
+ To check for a supported command
+ always check the return value to be 2.
+ :2match The |:2match| command.
+ :3match The |:3match| command.
+ #event autocommand defined for this event
+ #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and
+ pattern (the pattern is taken
+ literally and compared to the
+ autocommand patterns character by
+ character)
+ #group autocommand group exists
+ #group#event autocommand defined for this group and
+ event.
+ #group#event#pattern
+ autocommand defined for this group,
+ event and pattern.
+ ##event autocommand for this event is
+ supported.
+ For checking for a supported feature use |has()|.
+
+ Examples: >
+ exists("&shortname")
+ exists("$HOSTNAME")
+ exists("*strftime")
+ exists("*s:MyFunc")
+ exists("bufcount")
+ exists(":Make")
+ exists("#CursorHold")
+ exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz")
+ exists("#filetypeindent")
+ exists("#filetypeindent#FileType")
+ exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*")
+ exists("##ColorScheme")
+< There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the
+ name.
+ There must be no extra characters after the name, although in
+ a few cases this is ignored. That may become more strict in
+ the future, thus don't count on it!
+ Working example: >
+ exists(":make")
+< NOT working example: >
+ exists(":make install")
+
+< Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the
+ variable itself. For example: >
+ exists(bufcount)
+< This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable,
+ but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists.
+
+exp({expr}) *exp()*
+ Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+ [0, inf].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo exp(2)
+< 7.389056 >
+ :echo exp(-1)
+< 0.367879
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+expand({expr} [, {flag}]) *expand()*
+ Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}.
+ The result is a String. 'wildignorecase' applies.
+
+ When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
+ characters. [Note: in version 5.0 a space was used, which
+ caused problems when a file name contains a space]
+
+ If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name
+ for a non-existing file is not included.
+
+ When {expr} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done
+ like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated
+ modifiers. Here is a short overview:
+
+ % current file name
+ # alternate file name
+ #n alternate file name n
+ <cfile> file name under the cursor
+ <afile> autocmd file name
+ <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!)
+ <amatch> autocmd matched name
+ <sfile> sourced script file name
+ <slnum> sourced script file line number
+ <cword> word under the cursor
+ <cWORD> WORD under the cursor
+ <client> the {clientid} of the last received
+ message |server2client()|
+ Modifiers:
+ :p expand to full path
+ :h head (last path component removed)
+ :t tail (last path component only)
+ :r root (one extension removed)
+ :e extension only
+
+ Example: >
+ :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags"
+< Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or
+ '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: >
+ :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak")
+< Use this: >
+ :let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak"
+< Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the
+ referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>"
+ is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the
+ "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: >
+ :echo expand(expand("<cfile>"))
+<
+ There cannot be white space between the variables and the
+ following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used
+ to modify normal file names.
+
+ When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name
+ is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a
+ buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a
+ '/' added.
+
+ When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is
+ expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line.
+ 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional
+ {flag} argument is given and it is non-zero. Names for
+ non-existing files are included. The "**" item can be used to
+ search in a directory tree. For example, to find all "README"
+ files in the current directory and below: >
+ :echo expand("**/README")
+<
+ Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment
+ variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be
+ slow, because a shell must be started. See |expr-env-expand|.
+ The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file
+ names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is
+ left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in
+ "$FOOBAR".
+
+ See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for
+ getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()*
+ {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both
+ |Dictionaries|.
+
+ If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}.
+ If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before item
+ {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero insert before the
+ first item. When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then
+ {expr2} is appended.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5]))
+ :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1)
+< When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of
+ items copied is equal to the original length of the List.
+ E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item
+ (where N is the original length of the List).
+ Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate
+ two lists into a new list use the + operator: >
+ :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5]
+<
+ If they are |Dictionaries|:
+ Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}.
+ If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is
+ used to decide what to do:
+ {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1}
+ {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2}
+ {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737*
+ When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed.
+
+ {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary
+ make a copy of {expr1} first.
+ {expr2} remains unchanged.
+ Returns {expr1}.
+
+
+feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()*
+ Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they
+ come from a mapping or were typed by the user. They are added
+ to the end of the typeahead buffer, thus if a mapping is still
+ being executed these characters come after them.
+ The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in
+ {string}.
+ To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes
+ and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example,
+ feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But
+ feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters.
+ If {mode} is absent, keys are remapped.
+ {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+ 'm' Remap keys. This is default.
+ 'n' Do not remap keys.
+ 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as
+ if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo,
+ opening folds, etc.
+ Return value is always 0.
+
+filereadable({file}) *filereadable()*
+ The result is a Number, which is TRUE when a file with the
+ name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist,
+ or is a directory, the result is FALSE. {file} is any
+ expression, which is used as a String.
+ If you don't care about the file being readable you can use
+ |glob()|.
+ *file_readable()*
+ Obsolete name: file_readable().
+
+
+filewritable({file}) *filewritable()*
+ The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the
+ name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't
+ exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a
+ directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2.
+
+
+filter({expr}, {string}) *filter()*
+ {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
+ For each item in {expr} evaluate {string} and when the result
+ is zero remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|.
+ Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item.
+ For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item.
+ Examples: >
+ :call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"')
+< Removes the items where "OLD" appears. >
+ :call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8')
+< Removes the items with a key below 8. >
+ :call filter(var, 0)
+< Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|.
+
+ Note that {string} is the result of expression and is then
+ used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
+ |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes.
+
+ The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or
+ |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+ :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"')
+
+< Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
+ When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
+ further items in {expr} are processed.
+
+
+finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *finddir()*
+ Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and
+ upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching|
+ for the syntax of {path}.
+ Returns the path of the first found match. When the found
+ directory is below the current directory a relative path is
+ returned. Otherwise a full path is returned.
+ If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used.
+ If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of
+ {name} in {path} instead of the first one.
+ When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|.
+ This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path|
+ feature}
+
+findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *findfile()*
+ Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory.
+ Uses 'suffixesadd'.
+ Example: >
+ :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;")
+< Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until
+ it finds the file "tags.vim".
+
+float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()*
+ Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the
+ decimal point.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number.
+ When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the
+ result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff. NaN results
+ in -0x80000000.
+ Examples: >
+ echo float2nr(3.95)
+< 3 >
+ echo float2nr(-23.45)
+< -23 >
+ echo float2nr(1.0e100)
+< 2147483647 >
+ echo float2nr(-1.0e150)
+< -2147483647 >
+ echo float2nr(1.0e-100)
+< 0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+floor({expr}) *floor()*
+ Return the largest integral value less than or equal to
+ {expr} as a |Float| (round down).
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ echo floor(1.856)
+< 1.0 >
+ echo floor(-5.456)
+< -6.0 >
+ echo floor(4.0)
+< 4.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()*
+ Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the
+ division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2}
+ for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the
+ result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than
+ the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value
+ returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|.
+ {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo fmod(12.33, 1.22)
+< 0.13 >
+ :echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22)
+< -0.13
+ {only available when compiled with |+float| feature}
+
+
+fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()*
+ Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All
+ characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|'
+ are escaped with a backslash.
+ For most systems the characters escaped are
+ " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash
+ appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'.
+ A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit|
+ and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|).
+ Example: >
+ :let fname = '+some str%nge|name'
+ :exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname)
+< results in executing: >
+ edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name
+
+fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()*
+ Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a
+ string of characters like it is used for file names on the
+ command line. See |filename-modifiers|.
+ Example: >
+ :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h")
+< results in: >
+ /home/mool/vim/vim/src
+< Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use
+ |expand()| first then.
+
+foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()*
+ The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+ fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold.
+ If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+
+foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()*
+ The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed
+ fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold.
+ If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned.
+
+foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum}
+ in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is
+ returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is
+ returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed.
+ When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is
+ returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the
+ foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the
+ previous line is usually available.
+
+ *foldtext()*
+foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is
+ the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should
+ only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the
+ |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables.
+ The returned string looks like this: >
+ +-- 45 lines: abcdef
+< The number of dashes depends on the foldlevel. The "45" is
+ the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text in the
+ first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, "//"
+ or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and 'commentstring'
+ options is removed.
+ {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()*
+ Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line
+ {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context.
+ When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is
+ returned.
+ {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current
+ line, "'m" mark m, etc.
+ Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML.
+ {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature}
+
+ *foreground()*
+foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from
+ a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()|
+ On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always
+ allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use
+ |remote_foreground()| instead.
+ {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+ Win32 console version}
+
+
+function({name}) *function()* *E700*
+ Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}.
+ {name} can be a user defined function or an internal function.
+
+
+garbagecollect([at_exit]) *garbagecollect()*
+ Cleanup unused |Lists| and |Dictionaries| that have circular
+ references. There is hardly ever a need to invoke this
+ function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of
+ memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after
+ 'updatetime'. Items without circular references are always
+ freed when they become unused.
+ This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or
+ |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs
+ for a long time.
+ When the optional "at_exit" argument is one, garbage
+ collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't
+ done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks.
+
+get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()*
+ Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not
+ available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is
+ omitted.
+get({dict}, {key} [, {default}])
+ Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this
+ item is not available return {default}. Return zero when
+ {default} is omitted.
+
+ *getbufline()*
+getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}])
+ Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end}
+ (inclusive) in the buffer {expr}. If {end} is omitted, a
+ |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned.
+
+ For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+
+ For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the
+ buffer. Otherwise a number must be used.
+
+ When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+ lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+ When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer,
+ it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the
+ buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is
+ returned.
+
+ This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and
+ non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned.
+
+ Example: >
+ :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$")
+
+getbufvar({expr}, {varname}) *getbufvar()*
+ The result is the value of option or local buffer variable
+ {varname} in buffer {expr}. Note that the name without "b:"
+ must be used.
+ When {varname} is empty returns a dictionary with all the
+ buffer-local variables.
+ This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it
+ doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or
+ window-local option.
+ For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+ When the buffer or variable doesn't exist an empty string is
+ returned, there is no error message.
+ Examples: >
+ :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod")
+ :echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar")
+<
+getchar([expr]) *getchar()*
+ Get a single character from the user or input stream.
+ If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available.
+ If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available.
+ Return zero otherwise.
+ If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is
+ not consumed. Return zero if no character available.
+
+ Without {expr} and when {expr} is 0 a whole character or
+ special key is returned. If it is an 8-bit character, the
+ result is a number. Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+ Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character.
+ For a special key it's a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80
+ (decimal: 128). This is the same value as the string
+ "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is also a
+ String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is
+ not included in the character.
+
+ When {expr} is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a
+ one-byte character it is the character itself as a number.
+ Use nr2char() to convert it to a String.
+
+ When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be
+ returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|,
+ |v:mouse_lnum| and |v:mouse_win|. This example positions the
+ mouse as it would normally happen: >
+ let c = getchar()
+ if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0
+ exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w"
+ exe v:mouse_lnum
+ exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|"
+ endif
+<
+ There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the
+ user that a character has to be typed.
+ There is no mapping for the character.
+ Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del>
+ key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character
+ sequence. Examples: >
+ getchar() == "\<Del>"
+ getchar() == "\<S-Left>"
+< This example redefines "f" to ignore case: >
+ :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR>
+ :function FindChar()
+ : let c = nr2char(getchar())
+ : while col('.') < col('$') - 1
+ : normal l
+ : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c
+ : break
+ : endif
+ : endwhile
+ :endfunction
+
+getcharmod() *getcharmod()*
+ The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for
+ the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way.
+ These values are added together:
+ 2 shift
+ 4 control
+ 8 alt (meta)
+ 16 mouse double click
+ 32 mouse triple click
+ 64 mouse quadruple click
+ 128 Macintosh only: command
+ Only the modifiers that have not been included in the
+ character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A"
+ without a modifier.
+
+getcmdline() *getcmdline()*
+ Return the current command-line. Only works when the command
+ line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or
+ |c_CTRL-R_=|.
+ Example: >
+ :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR>
+< Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|.
+
+getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()*
+ Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a
+ byte count. The first column is 1.
+ Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+ |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns 0 otherwise.
+ Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()*
+ Return the current command-line type. Possible return values
+ are:
+ : normal Ex command
+ > debug mode command |debug-mode|
+ / forward search command
+ ? backward search command
+ @ |input()| command
+ - |:insert| or |:append| command
+ Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of
+ |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=|. Returns an empty string
+ otherwise.
+ Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|.
+
+ *getcwd()*
+getcwd() The result is a String, which is the name of the current
+ working directory.
+
+getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the
+ given file {fname}.
+ If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned.
+ If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned.
+ If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2
+ is returned.
+
+getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()*
+ Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being
+ used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group
+ |hl-Normal|.
+ With an argument a check is done whether {name} is a valid
+ font name. If not then an empty string is returned.
+ Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the
+ GUI does not support obtaining the real name.
+ Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or
+ gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this
+ function just after the GUI has started.
+ Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking
+ for a valid name does not work.
+
+getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()*
+ The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute
+ permissions of the given file {fname}.
+ If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an
+ empty string is returned.
+ The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of
+ "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner
+ of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users.
+ If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this
+ is replaced with the string "-". Example: >
+ :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd")
+< This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display
+ the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------".
+
+getftime({fname}) *getftime()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of
+ the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds
+ since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also
+ |localtime()| and |strftime()|.
+ If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned.
+
+getftype({fname}) *getftype()*
+ The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of
+ file of the given file {fname}.
+ If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned.
+ Here is a table over different kinds of files and their
+ results:
+ Normal file "file"
+ Directory "dir"
+ Symbolic link "link"
+ Block device "bdev"
+ Character device "cdev"
+ Socket "socket"
+ FIFO "fifo"
+ All other "other"
+ Example: >
+ getftype("/home")
+< Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on
+ systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and
+ "file" are returned.
+
+ *getline()*
+getline({lnum} [, {end}])
+ Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum}
+ from the current buffer. Example: >
+ getline(1)
+< When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a
+ digit, line() is called to translate the String into a Number.
+ To get the line under the cursor: >
+ getline(".")
+< When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of
+ lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned.
+
+ When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is
+ a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end},
+ including line {end}.
+ {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}.
+ Non-existing lines are silently omitted.
+ When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned.
+ Example: >
+ :let start = line('.')
+ :let end = search("^$") - 1
+ :let lines = getline(start, end)
+
+< To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()|
+
+getloclist({nr}) *getloclist()*
+ Returns a list with all the entries in the location list for
+ window {nr}. When {nr} is zero the current window is used.
+ For a location list window, the displayed location list is
+ returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is
+ returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|.
+
+getmatches() *getmatches()*
+ Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by
+ |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. |getmatches()| is
+ useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()|
+ can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|.
+ Example: >
+ :echo getmatches()
+< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+ 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+ 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+ :let m = getmatches()
+ :call clearmatches()
+ :echo getmatches()
+< [] >
+ :call setmatches(m)
+ :echo getmatches()
+< [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO',
+ 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2',
+ 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] >
+ :unlet m
+<
+
+getqflist() *getqflist()*
+ Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors. Each
+ list item is a dictionary with these entries:
+ bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use
+ bufname() to get the name
+ lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1)
+ col column number (first column is 1)
+ vcol non-zero: "col" is visual column
+ zero: "col" is byte index
+ nr error number
+ pattern search pattern used to locate the error
+ text description of the error
+ type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc.
+ valid non-zero: recognized error message
+
+ When there is no error list or it's empty an empty list is
+ returned. Quickfix list entries with non-existing buffer
+ number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero.
+
+ Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and
+ do something with them: >
+ :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c
+ :for d in getqflist()
+ : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text
+ :endfor
+
+
+getreg([{regname} [, 1]]) *getreg()*
+ The result is a String, which is the contents of register
+ {regname}. Example: >
+ :let cliptext = getreg('*')
+< getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression
+ register. (For use in maps.)
+ getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can
+ be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra
+ argument is ignored, thus you can always give it.
+ If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+
+
+getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()*
+ The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}.
+ The value will be one of:
+ "v" for |characterwise| text
+ "V" for |linewise| text
+ "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text
+ 0 for an empty or unknown register
+ <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16.
+ If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used.
+
+gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname}) *gettabvar()*
+ Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page
+ {tabnr}. |t:var|
+ Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+ Note that the name without "t:" must be used.
+
+gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}) *gettabwinvar()*
+ Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window
+ {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}.
+ When {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a window-local
+ option.
+ Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
+ use |getwinvar()|.
+ When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+ This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and
+ window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable
+ or buffer-local variable.
+ When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local
+ variables is returned.
+ Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:".
+ Examples: >
+ :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list')
+ :echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar')
+<
+ *getwinposx()*
+getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of
+ the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. The result will be
+ -1 if the information is not available.
+
+ *getwinposy()*
+getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of
+ the top of the GUI Vim window. The result will be -1 if the
+ information is not available.
+
+getwinvar({winnr}, {varname}) *getwinvar()*
+ Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage.
+ Examples: >
+ :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list')
+ :echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar')
+<
+glob({expr} [, {flag}]) *glob()*
+ Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the
+ use of special characters.
+ The result is a String.
+ When there are several matches, they are separated by <NL>
+ characters.
+ Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
+ the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+ one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+ 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+ 'wildignorecase' always applies.
+ If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string.
+ A name for a non-existing file is not included.
+
+ For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from
+ any external command. Example: >
+ :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`")
+ :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g")
+< The result of the program inside the backticks should be one
+ item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed.
+
+ See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See
+ |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command.
+
+globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) *globpath()*
+ Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate
+ the results. Example: >
+ :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim")
+< {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each
+ directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with
+ |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed.
+ To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a
+ backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a
+ trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it.
+ If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no
+ error message.
+ Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero,
+ the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching
+ one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and
+ 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches.
+
+ The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree.
+ For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories
+ in 'runtimepath' and below: >
+ :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt")
+< Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not
+ supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly.
+
+ *has()*
+has({feature}) The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is
+ supported, zero otherwise. The {feature} argument is a
+ string. See |feature-list| below.
+ Also see |exists()|.
+
+
+has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()*
+ The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has
+ an entry with key {key}. Zero otherwise.
+
+haslocaldir() *haslocaldir()*
+ The result is a Number, which is 1 when the current
+ window has set a local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise.
+
+hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()*
+ The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that
+ contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to)
+ and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by
+ {mode}.
+ When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+ instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or
+ Command-line mode.
+ Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current
+ buffer are checked for a match.
+ If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned.
+ The following characters are recognized in {mode}:
+ n Normal mode
+ v Visual mode
+ o Operator-pending mode
+ i Insert mode
+ l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.)
+ c Command-line mode
+ When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used.
+
+ This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists
+ to a function in a Vim script. Example: >
+ :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit')
+ : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit
+ :endif
+< This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't
+ already a mapping to "\ABCdoit".
+
+histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()*
+ Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be
+ one of: *hist-names*
+ "cmd" or ":" command line history
+ "search" or "/" search pattern history
+ "expr" or "=" typed expression history
+ "input" or "@" input line history
+ If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be
+ shifted to become the newest entry.
+ The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful,
+ otherwise 0 is returned.
+
+ Example: >
+ :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d"))
+ :let date=input("Enter date: ")
+< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()*
+ Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names|
+ for the possible values of {history}.
+
+ If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a
+ regular expression. All entries matching that expression will
+ be removed from the history (if there are any).
+ Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|.
+ If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as
+ an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will
+ be removed if it exists.
+
+ The result is a Number: 1 for a successful operation,
+ otherwise 0 is returned.
+
+ Examples:
+ Clear expression register history: >
+ :call histdel("expr")
+<
+ Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: >
+ :call histdel("/", '^\*')
+<
+ The following three are equivalent: >
+ :call histdel("search", histnr("search"))
+ :call histdel("search", -1)
+ :call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$')
+<
+ To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for
+ the "n" command and 'hlsearch': >
+ :call histdel("search", -1)
+ :let @/ = histget("search", -1)
+
+histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()*
+ The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from
+ {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of
+ {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is
+ no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is
+ omitted, the most recent item from the history is used.
+
+ Examples:
+ Redo the second last search from history. >
+ :execute '/' . histget("search", -2)
+
+< Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of
+ the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. >
+ :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>)
+<
+histnr({history}) *histnr()*
+ The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}.
+ See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}.
+ If an error occurred, -1 is returned.
+
+ Example: >
+ :let inp_index = histnr("expr")
+<
+hlexists({name}) *hlexists()*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a highlight group
+ called {name} exists. This is when the group has been
+ defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has
+ been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax
+ item.
+ *highlight_exists()*
+ Obsolete name: highlight_exists().
+
+ *hlID()*
+hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group
+ with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist,
+ zero is returned.
+ This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight
+ group. For example, to get the background color of the
+ "Comment" group: >
+ :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg")
+< *highlightID()*
+ Obsolete name: highlightID().
+
+hostname() *hostname()*
+ The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on
+ which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than
+ 256 characters long are truncated.
+
+iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()*
+ The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted
+ from encoding {from} to encoding {to}.
+ When the conversion completely fails an empty string is
+ returned. When some characters could not be converted they
+ are replaced with "?".
+ The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function
+ can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv".
+ Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv|
+ feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back
+ can be done.
+ This can be used to display messages with special characters,
+ no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in
+ UTF-8 and use: >
+ echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc)
+< Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion
+ from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You
+ cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature}
+
+ *indent()*
+indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the
+ current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value
+ of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in
+ |getline()|.
+ When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned.
+
+
+index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()*
+ Return the lowest index in |List| {list} where the item has a
+ value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so
+ the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number
+ 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase'
+ is not used here, case always matters.
+ If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index
+ {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end).
+ When {ic} is given and it is non-zero, ignore case. Otherwise
+ case must match.
+ -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {list}.
+ Example: >
+ :let idx = index(words, "the")
+ :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0
+
+
+input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()*
+ The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on
+ the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt
+ string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used
+ in the prompt to start a new line.
+ The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt.
+ The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same
+ editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history
+ for lines typed for input().
+ Example: >
+ :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer"
+ : echo "Cheers!"
+ :endif
+<
+ If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this
+ is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this.
+ Example: >
+ :let color = input("Color? ", "white")
+
+< The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of
+ completion supported for the input. Without it completion is
+ not performed. The supported completion types are the same as
+ that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the
+ "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for
+ more information. Example: >
+ let fname = input("File: ", "", "file")
+<
+ NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for
+ the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI).
+ Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will
+ consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a
+ mapping is handled like the characters were typed.
+ Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()|
+ after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid
+ that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using
+ |:execute| or |:normal|.
+
+ Example with a mapping: >
+ :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR>
+ :function GetFoo()
+ : call inputsave()
+ : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ")
+ : call inputrestore()
+ :endfunction
+
+inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()*
+ Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs
+ are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text.
+ Example: >
+ :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", &sw)
+ :if n != ""
+ : let &sw = n
+ :endif
+< When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When
+ omitted an empty string is returned.
+ Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting
+ <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button.
+ NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()*
+ {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is
+ displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to
+ enter a number, which is returned.
+ The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the
+ mouse. For the first string 0 is returned. When clicking
+ above the first item a negative number is returned. When
+ clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist}
+ is returned.
+ Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise
+ it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at
+ the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item.
+ Example: >
+ let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red',
+ \ '2. green', '3. blue'])
+
+inputrestore() *inputrestore()*
+ Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|.
+ Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is
+ called. Calling it more often is harmless though.
+ Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise.
+
+inputsave() *inputsave()*
+ Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that
+ a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be
+ followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can
+ be used several times, in which case there must be just as
+ many inputrestore() calls.
+ Returns 1 when out of memory, 0 otherwise.
+
+inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()*
+ This function acts much like the |input()| function with but
+ two exceptions:
+ a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of
+ asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and
+ b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input
+ |history| stack.
+ The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually
+ typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt.
+ NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported.
+
+insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()*
+ Insert {item} at the start of |List| {list}.
+ If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index
+ {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just
+ like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see
+ |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item.
+ Returns the resulting |List|. Examples: >
+ :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1)
+ :call insert(mylist, 4, -1)
+ :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist))
+< The last example can be done simpler with |add()|.
+ Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single
+ item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|.
+
+isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero when a directory
+ with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't
+ exist, or isn't a directory, the result is FALSE. {directory}
+ is any expression, which is used as a String.
+
+islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786*
+ The result is a Number, which is non-zero when {expr} is the
+ name of a locked variable.
+ {expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or
+ |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! Example: >
+ :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3]
+ :lockvar 1 alist
+ :echo islocked('alist') " 1
+ :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0
+
+< When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error
+ message. Use |exists()| to check for existence.
+
+items({dict}) *items()*
+ Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each
+ |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict}
+ entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary
+ order.
+
+
+join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()*
+ Join the items in {list} together into one String.
+ When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If
+ {sep} is omitted a single space is used.
+ Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to
+ add it there too: >
+ let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n"
+< String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are
+ converted into a string like with |string()|.
+ The opposite function is |split()|.
+
+keys({dict}) *keys()*
+ Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in
+ arbitrary order.
+
+ *len()* *E701*
+len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument.
+ When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is
+ used, as with |strlen()|.
+ When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is
+ returned.
+ When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the
+ |Dictionary| is returned.
+ Otherwise an error is given.
+
+ *libcall()* *E364* *E368*
+libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+ Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname}
+ with single argument {argument}.
+ This is useful to call functions in a library that you
+ especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument
+ is possible, calling standard library functions is rather
+ limited.
+ The result is the String returned by the function. If the
+ function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string ""
+ to Vim.
+ If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()!
+ If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an
+ int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a
+ null-terminated string.
+ This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+ libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to
+ Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a
+ means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will
+ very probably crash.
+
+ For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL
+ and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is
+ used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly
+ one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer,
+ and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character
+ pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid
+ after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the
+ DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will
+ leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work,
+ it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded.
+
+ WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may
+ crash! This also happens if the function returns a number,
+ because Vim thinks it's a pointer.
+ For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL
+ without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if
+ the DLL is not in the usual places.
+ For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the
+ object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC').
+ {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+ feature is present}
+ Examples: >
+ :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME")
+<
+ *libcallnr()*
+libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument})
+ Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an
+ int instead of a string.
+ {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall|
+ feature is present}
+ Examples: >
+ :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "")
+ :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n")
+ :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10)
+<
+ *line()*
+line({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file
+ position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are:
+ . the cursor position
+ $ the last line in the current buffer
+ 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+ returned)
+ w0 first line visible in current window
+ w$ last line visible in current window
+ v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the
+ cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode
+ returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in
+ that it's updated right away.
+ Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number
+ then applies to another buffer.
+ To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use
+ |getpos()|.
+ Examples: >
+ line(".") line number of the cursor
+ line("'t") line number of mark t
+ line("'" . marker) line number of mark marker
+< *last-position-jump*
+ This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file
+ just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: >
+ :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif
+
+line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()*
+ Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line
+ {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on
+ the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first
+ line returns 1.
+ This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just
+ below the last line: >
+ line2byte(line("$") + 1)
+< This is the file size plus one.
+ When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been
+ disabled at compile time, -1 is returned.
+ Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|.
+
+lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()*
+ Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp
+ indenting rules, as with 'lisp'.
+ The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is
+ relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|.
+ When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the
+ |+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned.
+
+localtime() *localtime()*
+ Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan
+ 1970. See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|.
+
+
+log({expr}) *log()*
+ Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range
+ (0, inf].
+ Examples: >
+ :echo log(10)
+< 2.302585 >
+ :echo log(exp(5))
+< 5.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+log10({expr}) *log10()*
+ Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo log10(1000)
+< 3.0 >
+ :echo log10(0.01)
+< -2.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+map({expr}, {string}) *map()*
+ {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|.
+ Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating
+ {string}.
+ Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item.
+ For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item
+ and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item.
+ Example: >
+ :call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"')
+< This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist".
+
+ Note that {string} is the result of an expression and is then
+ used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a
+ |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You
+ still have to double ' quotes
+
+ The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or
+ |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+ :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' & . "\t"')
+
+< Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered.
+ When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no
+ further items in {expr} are processed.
+
+
+maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()*
+ When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping
+ {name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special
+ characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command
+ listing.
+
+ When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is
+ returned.
+
+ The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map"
+ command.
+
+ {mode} can be one of these strings:
+ "n" Normal
+ "v" Visual (including Select)
+ "o" Operator-pending
+ "i" Insert
+ "c" Cmd-line
+ "s" Select
+ "x" Visual
+ "l" langmap |language-mapping|
+ "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+ When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used.
+
+ When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+ instead of mappings.
+
+ When {dict} is there and it is non-zero return a dictionary
+ containing all the information of the mapping with the
+ following items:
+ "lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping.
+ "rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed.
+ "silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0.
+ "noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable.
+ "expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|).
+ "buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|).
+ "mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In
+ addition to the modes mentioned above, these
+ characters will be used:
+ " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending
+ "!" Insert and Commandline mode
+ (|mapmode-ic|)
+ "sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings
+ (|<SID>|).
+
+ The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+ then the global mappings.
+ This function can be used to map a key even when it's already
+ mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: >
+ exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n')
+
+
+mapcheck({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()*
+ Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode
+ {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in
+ {name}.
+ When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations
+ instead of mappings.
+ A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and
+ with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}.
+
+ matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~
+ mapcheck("a") yes yes yes
+ mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes
+ mapcheck("ax") yes no no
+ mapcheck("b") no no no
+
+ The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a
+ mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a
+ mapping for {name} exactly.
+ When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty
+ String is returned. If there is one, the rhs of that mapping
+ is returned. If there are several mappings that start with
+ {name}, the rhs of one of them is returned.
+ The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first,
+ then the global mappings.
+ This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added
+ without being ambiguous. Example: >
+ :if mapcheck("_vv") == ""
+ : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR>
+ :endif
+< This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a
+ mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv".
+
+match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *match()*
+ When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the
+ first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a
+ String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed.
+ Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a
+ Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where
+ {pat} matches.
+ A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero.
+ If there is no match -1 is returned.
+ Example: >
+ :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4
+ :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1
+< See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+ *strpbrk()*
+ Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: >
+ :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]')
+< *strcasestr()*
+ Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add
+ "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: >
+ :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle')
+<
+ If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index
+ {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|.
+ The result, however, is still the index counted from the
+ first character/item. Example: >
+ :echo match("testing", "ing", 2)
+< result is again "4". >
+ :echo match("testing", "ing", 4)
+< result is again "4". >
+ :echo match("testing", "t", 2)
+< result is "3".
+ For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts
+ {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except
+ when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the
+ {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it
+ backwards compatible).
+ For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list
+ the index is counted from the end.
+ If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a
+ String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned.
+
+ When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match
+ is found in a String the search for the next one starts one
+ character further. Thus this example results in 1: >
+ echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2)
+< In a |List| the search continues in the next item.
+ Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes,
+ see above.
+
+ See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted.
+ The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of
+ the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always
+ done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty.
+
+ *matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801*
+matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]])
+ Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a
+ "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an
+ identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the
+ match using |matchdelete()|.
+
+ The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the
+ match. A match with a high priority will have its
+ highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority.
+ A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no
+ exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the
+ default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero,
+ hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will
+ overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate
+ mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will
+ always overrule syntax highlighting.
+
+ The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific
+ match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error
+ message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID
+ is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2
+ and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|,
+ respectively. If the {id} argument is not specified,
+ |matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID.
+
+ The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with
+ the |:match| commands.
+
+ Example: >
+ :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green
+ :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO")
+< Deletion of the pattern: >
+ :call matchdelete(m)
+
+< A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are
+ available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in
+ one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+
+matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()*
+ Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|,
+ |:2match| or |:3match| command.
+ Return a |List| with two elements:
+ The name of the highlight group used
+ The pattern used.
+ When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|.
+ When there is no match item set returns ['', ''].
+ This is useful to save and restore a |:match|.
+ Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited
+ to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation.
+
+matchdelete({id}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803*
+ Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()|
+ or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful,
+ otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can
+ be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|.
+
+matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()*
+ Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character
+ after the match. Example: >
+ :echo matchend("testing", "ing")
+< results in "7".
+ *strspn()* *strcspn()*
+ Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can
+ do it with matchend(): >
+ :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]')
+ :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]')
+< Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches.
+
+ The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+ :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2)
+< results in "7". >
+ :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5)
+< result is "-1".
+ When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|.
+
+matchlist({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchlist()*
+ Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the
+ list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would
+ return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc.
+ in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an
+ empty string is used. Example: >
+ echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)')
+< Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', '']
+ When there is no match an empty list is returned.
+
+matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchstr()*
+ Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: >
+ :echo matchstr("testing", "ing")
+< results in "ing".
+ When there is no match "" is returned.
+ The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. >
+ :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2)
+< results in "ing". >
+ :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5)
+< result is "".
+ When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned.
+ The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String.
+
+ *max()*
+max({list}) Return the maximum value of all items in {list}.
+ If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot
+ be used as a Number this results in an error.
+ An empty |List| results in zero.
+
+ *min()*
+min({list}) Return the minimum value of all items in {list}.
+ If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot
+ be used as a Number this results in an error.
+ An empty |List| results in zero.
+
+ *mkdir()* *E739*
+mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]])
+ Create directory {name}.
+ If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as
+ necessary. Otherwise it must be "".
+ If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of
+ the new directory. The default is 0755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for
+ the user readable for others). Use 0700 to make it unreadable
+ for others. This is only used for the last part of {name}.
+ Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created
+ with 0755.
+ Example: >
+ :call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0700)
+< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ Not available on all systems. To check use: >
+ :if exists("*mkdir")
+<
+ *mode()*
+mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode.
+ If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+ a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is
+ returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. Note
+ that " " and "0" are also non-empty strings.
+
+ n Normal
+ no Operator-pending
+ v Visual by character
+ V Visual by line
+ CTRL-V Visual blockwise
+ s Select by character
+ S Select by line
+ CTRL-S Select blockwise
+ i Insert
+ R Replace |R|
+ Rv Virtual Replace |gR|
+ c Command-line
+ cv Vim Ex mode |gQ|
+ ce Normal Ex mode |Q|
+ r Hit-enter prompt
+ rm The -- more -- prompt
+ r? A |:confirm| query of some sort
+ ! Shell or external command is executing
+ This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used
+ with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns
+ "c" or "n".
+ Also see |visualmode()|.
+
+mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()*
+ Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result
+ convert to Vim data structures.
+ Numbers and strings are returned as they are.
+ Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are
+ returned as Vim |Lists|.
+ Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys
+ converted to strings.
+ All other types are converted to string with display function.
+ Examples: >
+ :mz (define l (list 1 2 3))
+ :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l)
+ :echo mzeval("l")
+ :echo mzeval("h")
+<
+ {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature}
+
+nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()*
+ Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum}
+ that is not blank. Example: >
+ if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java"
+< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+ below it, zero is returned.
+ See also |prevnonblank()|.
+
+nr2char({expr}) *nr2char()*
+ Return a string with a single character, which has the number
+ value {expr}. Examples: >
+ nr2char(64) returns "@"
+ nr2char(32) returns " "
+< The current 'encoding' is used. Example for "utf-8": >
+ nr2char(300) returns I with bow character
+< Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with
+ nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline
+ characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the
+ string, thus results in an empty string.
+
+ *getpid()*
+getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process.
+ On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim
+ exits. On MS-DOS it's always zero.
+
+ *getpos()*
+getpos({expr}) Get the position for {expr}. For possible values of {expr}
+ see |line()|.
+ The result is a |List| with four numbers:
+ [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+ "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it
+ is the buffer number of the mark.
+ "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
+ column is 1.
+ The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then
+ it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+ character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+ character.
+ This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: >
+ let save_cursor = getpos(".")
+ MoveTheCursorAround
+ call setpos('.', save_cursor)
+< Also see |setpos()|.
+
+pathshorten({expr}) *pathshorten()*
+ Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the
+ result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other
+ components in the path are reduced to single letters. Leading
+ '~' and '.' characters are kept. Example: >
+ :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim')
+< ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~
+ It doesn't matter if the path exists or not.
+
+pow({x}, {y}) *pow()*
+ Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|.
+ {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo pow(3, 3)
+< 27.0 >
+ :echo pow(2, 16)
+< 65536.0 >
+ :echo pow(32, 0.20)
+< 2.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()*
+ Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum}
+ that is not blank. Example: >
+ let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1))
+< When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or
+ above it, zero is returned.
+ Also see |nextnonblank()|.
+
+
+printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()*
+ Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by
+ the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: >
+ printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg)
+< May result in:
+ " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~
+
+ Often used items are:
+ %s string
+ %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes
+ %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes
+ %c single byte
+ %d decimal number
+ %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters
+ %x hex number
+ %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters
+ %X hex number using upper case letters
+ %o octal number
+ %f floating point number in the form 123.456
+ %e floating point number in the form 1.234e3
+ %E floating point number in the form 1.234E3
+ %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value
+ %G floating point number, as %f or %E depending on value
+ %% the % character itself
+
+ Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the
+ conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to
+ the result.
+
+ The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following
+ arguments appear in sequence:
+
+ % [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type
+
+ flags
+ Zero or more of the following flags:
+
+ # The value should be converted to an "alternate
+ form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option
+ has no effect. For o conversions, the precision
+ of the number is increased to force the first
+ character of the output string to a zero (except
+ if a zero value is printed with an explicit
+ precision of zero).
+ For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has
+ the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions)
+ prepended to it.
+
+ 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted
+ value is padded on the left with zeros rather
+ than blanks. If a precision is given with a
+ numeric conversion (d, o, x, and X), the 0 flag
+ is ignored.
+
+ - A negative field width flag; the converted value
+ is to be left adjusted on the field boundary.
+ The converted value is padded on the right with
+ blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or
+ zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given.
+
+ ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive
+ number produced by a signed conversion (d).
+
+ + A sign must always be placed before a number
+ produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides
+ a space if both are used.
+
+ field-width
+ An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum
+ field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes
+ than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on
+ the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has
+ been given) to fill out the field width.
+
+ .precision
+ An optional precision, in the form of a period '.'
+ followed by an optional digit string. If the digit
+ string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero.
+ This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for
+ d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of
+ bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions.
+ For floating point it is the number of digits after
+ the decimal point.
+
+ type
+ A character that specifies the type of conversion to
+ be applied, see below.
+
+ A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an
+ asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a
+ Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A
+ negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag
+ followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is
+ treated as though it were missing. Example: >
+ :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line)
+< This limits the length of the text used from "line" to
+ "width" bytes.
+
+ The conversion specifiers and their meanings are:
+
+ *printf-d* *printf-o* *printf-x* *printf-X*
+ doxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal
+ (d), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x
+ and X) notation. The letters "abcdef" are used for
+ x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X
+ conversions.
+ The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of
+ digits that must appear; if the converted value
+ requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with
+ zeros.
+ In no case does a non-existent or small field width
+ cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of
+ a conversion is wider than the field width, the field
+ is expanded to contain the conversion result.
+
+ *printf-c*
+ c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the
+ resulting character is written.
+
+ *printf-s*
+ s The text of the String argument is used. If a
+ precision is specified, no more bytes than the number
+ specified are used.
+
+ *printf-f* *E807*
+ f The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+ form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of
+ digits after the decimal point. When the precision is
+ zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision
+ is not specified 6 is used. A really big number
+ (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf".
+ "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan".
+ Example: >
+ echo printf("%.2f", 12.115)
+< 12.12
+ Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries.
+ Use |round()| when in doubt.
+
+ *printf-e* *printf-E*
+ e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the
+ form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The
+ precision specifies the number of digits after the
+ decimal point, like with 'f'.
+
+ *printf-g* *printf-G*
+ g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the
+ value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0
+ (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E'
+ for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous
+ zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero
+ immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0
+ results in 1.0e7.
+
+ *printf-%*
+ % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The
+ complete conversion specification is "%%".
+
+ When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also
+ accepted and automatically converted.
+ When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument
+ is also accepted and automatically converted.
+ Any other argument type results in an error message.
+
+ *E766* *E767*
+ The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number
+ of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many
+ arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used.
+
+
+pumvisible() *pumvisible()*
+ Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero
+ otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|.
+ This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the
+ popup menu.
+
+ *E726* *E727*
+range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()*
+ Returns a |List| with Numbers:
+ - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1]
+ - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}]
+ - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ...,
+ {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not
+ producing a value past {max}).
+ When the maximum is one before the start the result is an
+ empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the
+ start this is an error.
+ Examples: >
+ range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3]
+ range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4]
+ range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8]
+ range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2]
+ range(0) " []
+ range(2, 0) " error!
+<
+ *readfile()*
+readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]])
+ Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file
+ as an item. Lines broken at NL characters. Macintosh files
+ separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a
+ NL appears somewhere).
+ All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character.
+ When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used:
+ - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is
+ added.
+ - No CR characters are removed.
+ Otherwise:
+ - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed.
+ - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter.
+ - When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is
+ removed from the text.
+ When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines
+ to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten
+ lines of a file: >
+ :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10)
+ : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif
+ :endfor
+< When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file
+ are returned, or as many as there are.
+ When {max} is zero the result is an empty list.
+ Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory.
+ Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a
+ file into a buffer if you need to.
+ When the file can't be opened an error message is given and
+ the result is an empty list.
+ Also see |writefile()|.
+
+reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) *reltime()*
+ Return an item that represents a time value. The format of
+ the item depends on the system. It can be passed to
+ |reltimestr()| to convert it to a string.
+ Without an argument it returns the current time.
+ With one argument is returns the time passed since the time
+ specified in the argument.
+ With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start}
+ and {end}.
+ The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by
+ reltime().
+ {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()*
+ Return a String that represents the time value of {time}.
+ This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of
+ microseconds. Example: >
+ let start = reltime()
+ call MyFunction()
+ echo reltimestr(reltime(start))
+< Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time.
+ The accuracy depends on the system.
+ Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You
+ can use split() to remove it. >
+ echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0]
+< Also see |profiling|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+ *remote_expr()* *E449*
+remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+ Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as an
+ expression and the result is returned after evaluation.
+ The result must be a String or a |List|. A |List| is turned
+ into a String by joining the items with a line break in
+ between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n").
+ If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a
+ variable and a {serverid} for later use with
+ remote_read() is stored there.
+ See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued
+ and the result will be the empty string.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2")
+ :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax")
+<
+
+remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()*
+ Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground.
+ This works like: >
+ remote_expr({server}, "foreground()")
+< Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work
+ around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server
+ to bring itself to the foreground.
+ Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized,
+ like foreground() does.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the
+ Win32 console version}
+
+
+remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()*
+ Returns a positive number if there are available strings
+ from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable
+ {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the
+ name of a variable.
+ Returns zero if none are available.
+ Returns -1 if something is wrong.
+ See also |clientserver|.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Examples: >
+ :let repl = ""
+ :echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl
+
+remote_read({serverid}) *remote_read()*
+ Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume
+ it. It blocks until a reply is available.
+ See also |clientserver|.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Example: >
+ :echo remote_read(id)
+<
+ *remote_send()* *E241*
+remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}])
+ Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as input
+ keys and the function returns immediately. At the Vim server
+ the keys are not mapped |:map|.
+ If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable
+ and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored
+ there.
+ See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess
+ up the display.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid").
+ \ remote_read(serverid)
+
+ :autocmd NONE RemoteReply *
+ \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>"))
+ :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ".
+ \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>')
+<
+remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) *remove()*
+ Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and
+ return the item.
+ With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and
+ return a List with these items. When {idx} points to the same
+ item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end}
+ points to an item before {idx} this is an error.
+ See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}.
+ Example: >
+ :echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1)
+ :call remove(mylist, 0, 9)
+remove({dict}, {key})
+ Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key}. Example: >
+ :echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one")
+< If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error.
+
+ Use |delete()| to remove a file.
+
+rename({from}, {to}) *rename()*
+ Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This
+ should also work to move files across file systems. The
+ result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed
+ successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed.
+ NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()*
+ Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated
+ result. Example: >
+ :let separator = repeat('-', 80)
+< When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty.
+ When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated
+ {count} times. Example: >
+ :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3)
+< Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b'].
+
+
+resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655*
+ On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file),
+ returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form.
+ On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path
+ components of {filename} and return the simplified result.
+ To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is
+ stopped after 100 iterations.
+ On other systems, return the simplified {filename}.
+ The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|.
+ resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the
+ current directory (provided the result is still a relative
+ path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator.
+
+ *reverse()*
+reverse({list}) Reverse the order of items in {list} in-place. Returns
+ {list}.
+ If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+ :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist))
+
+round({expr}) *round()*
+ Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it
+ as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral
+ values, then use the larger one (away from zero).
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ echo round(0.456)
+< 0.0 >
+ echo round(4.5)
+< 5.0 >
+ echo round(-4.5)
+< -5.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *search()*
+ Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the
+ cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it).
+
+ {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags:
+ 'b' search backward instead of forward
+ 'c' accept a match at the cursor position
+ 'e' move to the End of the match
+ 'n' do Not move the cursor
+ 'p' return number of matching sub-pattern (see below)
+ 's' set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor
+ 'w' wrap around the end of the file
+ 'W' don't wrap around the end of the file
+ If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies.
+
+ If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the
+ cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n'
+ flag.
+
+ 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used.
+
+ When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops
+ after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the
+ search to a range of lines. Examples: >
+ let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0"))
+ let end = search('END', '', line("w$"))
+< When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies
+ that the search does not wrap around the end of the file.
+ A zero value is equal to not giving the argument.
+
+ When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when
+ more than this many milli seconds have passed. Thus when
+ {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second.
+ The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not
+ giving the argument.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature}
+
+ If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't
+ move. No error message is given.
+ When a match has been found its line number is returned.
+ *search()-sub-match*
+ With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the
+ first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the
+ whole pattern did match.
+ To get the column number too use |searchpos()|.
+
+ The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n'
+ flag is used.
+
+ Example (goes over all files in the argument list): >
+ :let n = 1
+ :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist
+ : exe "argument " . n
+ : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the
+ : " first search to find match at start of file
+ : normal G$
+ : let flags = "w"
+ : while search("foo", flags) > 0
+ : s/foo/bar/g
+ : let flags = "W"
+ : endwhile
+ : update " write the file if modified
+ : let n = n + 1
+ :endwhile
+<
+ Example for using some flags: >
+ :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe')
+< This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif"
+ under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it
+ returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0
+ if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the
+ line:
+ if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~
+ the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function
+ finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens
+ without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if".
+ The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor.
+
+
+searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()*
+ Search for the declaration of {name}.
+
+ With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find
+ first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find
+ first match in the function.
+
+ With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block
+ that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids
+ finding variable declarations only valid in another scope.
+
+ Moves the cursor to the found match.
+ Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+ Example: >
+ if searchdecl('myvar') == 0
+ echo getline('.')
+ endif
+<
+ *searchpair()*
+searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+ [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+ Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be
+ used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other
+ if/endif pairs in between are ignored.
+ The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search
+ forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward.
+ If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the
+ line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is
+ returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is
+ given.
+
+ {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They
+ must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When
+ {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either
+ direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A
+ typical use is: >
+ searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>')
+< By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped.
+
+ {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with
+ |search()|. Additionally:
+ 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the
+ outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag.
+ 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with
+ the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used.
+ Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to
+ avoid wrapping around the end of the file.
+
+ When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the
+ {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on
+ the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this
+ match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment
+ or a string.
+ When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted.
+ When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted
+ and -1 returned.
+
+ For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|.
+
+ The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the
+ patterns are used like it's on.
+
+ The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with
+ {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the
+ direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: >
+ if 1
+ if 2
+ endif 2
+ endif 1
+< When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and
+ searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on
+ the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be
+ found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and
+ then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to
+ "endif 2".
+ When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character,
+ it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so
+ that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds
+ the matching start.
+
+ Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: >
+
+ :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W',
+ \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""')
+
+< The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is
+ to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid
+ having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only
+ catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command.
+ Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a
+ match.
+ Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": >
+
+ :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW')
+
+< This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a
+ match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax
+ highlighting recognized as strings: >
+
+ :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW',
+ \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"')
+<
+ *searchpairpos()*
+searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip}
+ [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]])
+ Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+ column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+ is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+ the column position of the match. If no match is found,
+ returns [0, 0]. >
+
+ :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n')
+<
+ See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example.
+
+searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *searchpos()*
+ Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and
+ column position of the match. The first element of the |List|
+ is the line number and the second element is the byte index of
+ the column position of the match. If no match is found,
+ returns [0, 0].
+ Example: >
+ :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n')
+
+< When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with
+ the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: >
+ :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np')
+< In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is
+ found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|.
+
+server2client( {clientid}, {string}) *server2client()*
+ Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid}
+ that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>").
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Note:
+ This id has to be stored before the next command can be
+ received. I.e. before returning from the received command and
+ before calling any commands that waits for input.
+ See also |clientserver|.
+ Example: >
+ :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")
+<
+serverlist() *serverlist()*
+ Return a list of available server names, one per line.
+ When there are no servers or the information is not available
+ an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature}
+ Example: >
+ :echo serverlist()
+<
+setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()*
+ Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to
+ {val}.
+ This also works for a global or local window option, but it
+ doesn't work for a global or local window variable.
+ For a local window option the global value is unchanged.
+ For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above.
+ Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used.
+ Examples: >
+ :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1)
+ :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar")
+< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()*
+ Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position
+ {pos}. The first position is 1.
+ Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position.
+ Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use
+ |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For
+ |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is
+ set after the command line is set to the expression. For
+ |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but
+ before inserting the resulting text.
+ When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the
+ line. A number smaller than one has undefined results.
+ Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command
+ line.
+
+setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()*
+ Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}.
+ {lnum} is used like with |getline()|.
+ When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be
+ added as a new line.
+ If this succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely
+ because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: >
+ :call setline(5, strftime("%c"))
+< When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines
+ will be set to the items in the list. Example: >
+ :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc'])
+< This is equivalent to: >
+ :for [n, l] in [[5, 6, 7], ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']]
+ : call setline(n, l)
+ :endfor
+< Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set.
+
+setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) *setloclist()*
+ Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}.
+ When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location
+ list window, the displayed location list is modified. For an
+ invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned.
+ Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|.
+ Also see |location-list|.
+
+setmatches({list}) *setmatches()*
+ Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. Returns 0
+ if successful, otherwise -1. All current matches are cleared
+ before the list is restored. See example for |getmatches()|.
+
+ *setpos()*
+setpos({expr}, {list})
+ Set the position for {expr}. Possible values:
+ . the cursor
+ 'x mark x
+
+ {list} must be a |List| with four numbers:
+ [bufnum, lnum, col, off]
+
+ "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the
+ current buffer. Setting the cursor is only possible for
+ the current buffer. To set a mark in another buffer you can
+ use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer
+ number.
+ Does not change the jumplist.
+
+ "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first
+ column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is
+ smaller than 1 then 1 is used.
+
+ The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then
+ it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+ character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+ character.
+
+ Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise.
+ An error message is given if {expr} is invalid.
+
+ Also see |getpos()|
+
+ This does not restore the preferred column for moving
+ vertically. See |winrestview()| for that.
+
+
+setqflist({list} [, {action}]) *setqflist()*
+ Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items
+ in {list}. Each item in {list} is a dictionary.
+ Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored. Each dictionary
+ item can contain the following entries:
+
+ bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid
+ buffer
+ filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not
+ present or it is invalid.
+ lnum line number in the file
+ pattern search pattern used to locate the error
+ col column number
+ vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column
+ when zero: "col" is byte index
+ nr error number
+ text description of the error
+ type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc.
+
+ The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are
+ optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to
+ locate a matching error line.
+ If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or
+ neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the
+ item will not be handled as an error line.
+ If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will
+ be used.
+ If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be
+ cleared.
+ Note that the list is not exactly the same as what
+ |getqflist()| returns.
+
+ If {action} is set to 'a', then the items from {list} are
+ added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing
+ list, then a new list is created. If {action} is set to 'r',
+ then the items from the current quickfix list are replaced
+ with the items from {list}. If {action} is not present or is
+ set to ' ', then a new list is created.
+
+ Returns zero for success, -1 for failure.
+
+ This function can be used to create a quickfix list
+ independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like
+ ":cc 1" to jump to the first position.
+
+
+ *setreg()*
+setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}])
+ Set the register {regname} to {value}.
+ If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case,
+ then the value is appended.
+ {options} can also contain a register type specification:
+ "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode
+ "l" or "V" |linewise| mode
+ "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode
+ If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is
+ used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified
+ then the width of the block is set to the number of characters
+ in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character).
+
+ If {options} contains no register settings, then the default
+ is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>.
+ Setting the '=' register is not possible.
+ Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure.
+
+ Examples: >
+ :call setreg(v:register, @*)
+ :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac')
+ :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5')
+
+< This example shows using the functions to save and restore a
+ register. >
+ :let var_a = getreg('a', 1)
+ :let var_amode = getregtype('a')
+ ....
+ :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode)
+
+< You can also change the type of a register by appending
+ nothing: >
+ :call setreg('a', '', 'al')
+
+settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()*
+ Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}.
+ |t:var|
+ Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used.
+ Tabs are numbered starting with one.
+ Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger
+ TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands.
+ This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()*
+ Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to
+ {val}.
+ Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage
+ use |setwinvar()|.
+ When {winnr} is zero the current window is used.
+ This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it
+ doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable.
+ For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged.
+ Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used.
+ Vim briefly goes to the tab page {tabnr}, this may trigger
+ TabLeave and TabEnter autocommands.
+ Examples: >
+ :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0)
+ :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar")
+< This function is not available in the |sandbox|.
+
+setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()*
+ Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page.
+ Examples: >
+ :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0)
+ :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar")
+
+shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()*
+ Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument.
+ On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it
+ will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double
+ quotes within {string}.
+ For other systems, it will enclose {string} in single quotes
+ and replace all "'" with "'\''".
+ When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero
+ Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special
+ items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by
+ a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!|
+ command.
+ The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg|
+ {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is
+ because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement
+ even when inside single quotes.
+ The <NL> character is also escaped. With a |non-zero-arg|
+ {special} and 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's
+ escaped a second time.
+ Example of use with a |:!| command: >
+ :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1)
+< This results in a directory listing for the file under the
+ cursor. Example of use with |system()|: >
+ :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%")))
+
+
+simplify({filename}) *simplify()*
+ Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing
+ the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on
+ Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in
+ {filename} designates the current directory, this will be
+ valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is
+ not removed either.
+ Example: >
+ simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/"
+< Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is
+ a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also
+ removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same
+ directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic
+ links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|.
+
+
+sin({expr}) *sin()*
+ Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo sin(100)
+< -0.506366 >
+ :echo sin(-4.01)
+< 0.763301
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+sinh({expr}) *sinh()*
+ Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range
+ [-inf, inf].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo sinh(0.5)
+< 0.521095 >
+ :echo sinh(-0.9)
+< -1.026517
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+sort({list} [, {func}]) *sort()* *E702*
+ Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. If you
+ want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: >
+ :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist))
+< Uses the string representation of each item to sort on.
+ Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers.
+ For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|.
+ When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored.
+ When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function
+ is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two
+ items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or
+ bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or
+ smaller if the first one sorts before the second one.
+ Example: >
+ func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+ return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1
+ endfunc
+ let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare")
+< A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which
+ ignores overflow: >
+ func MyCompare(i1, i2)
+ return a:i1 - a:i2
+ endfunc
+<
+ *soundfold()*
+soundfold({word})
+ Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first
+ language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports
+ soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is
+ possible the {word} is returned unmodified.
+ This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that
+ the method can be quite slow.
+
+ *spellbadword()*
+spellbadword([{sentence}])
+ Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under
+ or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the
+ bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the
+ result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move.
+
+ With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that
+ is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the
+ result is an empty string.
+
+ The return value is a list with two items:
+ - The badly spelled word or an empty string.
+ - The type of the spelling error:
+ "bad" spelling mistake
+ "rare" rare word
+ "local" word only valid in another region
+ "caps" word should start with Capital
+ Example: >
+ echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox")
+< ['quik', 'bad'] ~
+
+ The spelling information for the current window is used. The
+ 'spell' option must be set and the value of 'spelllang' is
+ used.
+
+ *spellsuggest()*
+spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]])
+ Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}.
+ When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are
+ returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned.
+
+ When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only
+ suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this
+ after a match with 'spellcapcheck'.
+
+ {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text.
+ This allows for joining two words that were split. The
+ suggestions also include the following text, thus you can
+ replace a line.
+
+ {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be
+ returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions,
+ although it may appear capitalized.
+
+ The spelling information for the current window is used. The
+ 'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and
+ 'spellsuggest' are used.
+
+
+split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()*
+ Make a |List| out of {expr}. When {pattern} is omitted or
+ empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an
+ item.
+ Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches,
+ removing the matched characters.
+ When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the
+ {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero.
+ Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one
+ character or when {keepempty} is non-zero.
+ Example: >
+ :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+')
+< To split a string in individual characters: >
+ :for c in split(mystring, '\zs')
+< If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': >
+ :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs')
+< ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~
+ Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: >
+ :let items = split(line, ':', 1)
+< The opposite function is |join()|.
+
+
+sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()*
+ Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a
+ |Float|.
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr}
+ is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number).
+ Examples: >
+ :echo sqrt(100)
+< 10.0 >
+ :echo sqrt(-4.01)
+< nan
+ "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries.
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+str2float( {expr}) *str2float()*
+ Convert String {expr} to a Float. This mostly works the same
+ as when using a floating point number in an expression, see
+ |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive.
+ E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to
+ write "1.0e40".
+ Text after the number is silently ignored.
+ The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is
+ set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to
+ 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with
+ |substitute()|: >
+ let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g'))
+< {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) *str2nr()*
+ Convert string {expr} to a number.
+ {base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16.
+ When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that
+ a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as
+ with the default String to Number conversion.
+ When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a
+ different base the result will be zero.
+ Text after the number is silently ignored.
+
+
+strchars({expr}) *strchars()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the number of characters
+ String {expr} occupies. Composing characters are counted
+ separately.
+ Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|.
+
+strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+ String {expr} occupies on the screen.
+ When {col} is omitted zero is used. Otherwise it is the
+ screen column where to start. This matters for Tab
+ characters.
+ The option settings of the current window are used. This
+ matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as
+ 'tabstop' and 'display'.
+ When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+ Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+ Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()*
+ The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as
+ specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used,
+ or the current time if no time is given. The accepted
+ {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable!
+ See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the
+ format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters.
+ See also |localtime()| and |getftime()|.
+ The language can be changed with the |:language| command.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997
+ :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25
+ :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55
+ :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55
+ :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c"))
+ Show mod time of file.c.
+< Not available on all systems. To check use: >
+ :if exists("*strftime")
+
+stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()*
+ The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+ {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}.
+ If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}.
+ This can be used to find a second match: >
+ :let colon1 = stridx(line, ":")
+ :let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1)
+< The search is done case-sensitive.
+ For pattern searches use |match()|.
+ -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+ See also |strridx()|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3
+ :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0
+ :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1
+< *strstr()* *strchr()*
+ stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used
+ with a single character it works similar to strchr().
+
+ *string()*
+string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number,
+ Float, String or a composition of them, then the result can be
+ parsed back with |eval()|.
+ {expr} type result ~
+ String 'string'
+ Number 123
+ Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8
+ Funcref function('name')
+ List [item, item]
+ Dictionary {key: value, key: value}
+ Note that in String values the ' character is doubled.
+ Also see |strtrans()|.
+
+ *strlen()*
+strlen({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the String
+ {expr} in bytes.
+ If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters (not
+ counting composing characters) use something like this: >
+
+ :let len = strlen(substitute(str, ".", "x", "g"))
+<
+ If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String.
+ For other types an error is given.
+ Also see |len()|, |strchars()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and
+ |strwidth()|.
+
+strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}]) *strpart()*
+ The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from
+ byte {start}, with the byte length {len}.
+ When non-existing bytes are included, this doesn't result in
+ an error, the bytes are simply omitted.
+ If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the
+ end of the {src}. >
+ strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de"
+ strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab"
+ strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg"
+ strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg"
+< Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For
+ example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: >
+ strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3)
+<
+strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()*
+ The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in
+ {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}.
+ When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are
+ ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous
+ match: >
+ :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",")
+ :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1)
+< The search is done case-sensitive.
+ For pattern searches use |match()|.
+ -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}.
+ If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned.
+ See also |stridx()|. Examples: >
+ :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3
+< *strrchr()*
+ When used with a single character it works similar to the C
+ function strrchr().
+
+strtrans({expr}) *strtrans()*
+ The result is a String, which is {expr} with all unprintable
+ characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|.
+ Like they are shown in a window. Example: >
+ echo strtrans(@a)
+< This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of
+ starting a new line.
+
+strwidth({expr}) *strwidth()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells
+ String {expr} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one
+ cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|.
+ When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class
+ Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'.
+ Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|.
+
+submatch({nr}) *submatch()*
+ Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command. Returns
+ the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} is 0
+ the whole matched text is returned.
+ Example: >
+ :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/
+< This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it.
+ A line break is included as a newline character.
+
+substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()*
+ The result is a String, which is a copy of {expr}, in which
+ the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. This works
+ like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). But the
+ matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' option is
+ set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts portable).
+ 'ignorecase' is still relevant. 'smartcase' is not used.
+ See |string-match| for how {pat} is used.
+ And a "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}.
+ Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning
+ |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with
+ "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'.
+ When {pat} does not match in {expr}, {expr} is returned
+ unmodified.
+ When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {expr} are
+ replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "".
+ Example: >
+ :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "")
+< This removes the last component of the 'path' option. >
+ :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "")
+< results in "TESTING".
+
+synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position
+ {lnum} and {col} in the current window.
+ The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and
+ |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text.
+
+ {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first
+ line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned.
+
+ When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the
+ item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know
+ the effective color. When {trans} is zero, the transparent
+ item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which
+ syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens).
+ Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is
+ obtained by going through the file in forward direction.
+
+ Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): >
+ :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name")
+<
+
+synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()*
+ The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of
+ syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information
+ about a syntax item.
+ {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes
+ for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is
+ used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are
+ used (GUI, cterm or term).
+ Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups.
+ {what} result
+ "name" the name of the syntax item
+ "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set
+ the color, cterm: color number as a string,
+ term: empty string)
+ "bg" background color (as with "fg")
+ "font" font name (only available in the GUI)
+ |highlight-font|
+ "sp" special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp|
+ "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is
+ running the name in "#RRGGBB" form
+ "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg"
+ "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp"
+ "bold" "1" if bold
+ "italic" "1" if italic
+ "reverse" "1" if reverse
+ "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse)
+ "standout" "1" if standout
+ "underline" "1" if underlined
+ "undercurl" "1" if undercurled
+
+ Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the
+ cursor): >
+ :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg")
+<
+synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of
+ {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to
+ highlight the character. Highlight links given with
+ ":highlight link" are followed.
+
+synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()*
+ The result is a List. The first item in the list is 0 if the
+ character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a
+ concealable region, 1 if it is. The second item in the list is
+ a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the
+ text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text,
+ depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel'. The third
+ and final item in the list is a unique number representing the
+ specific syntax region matched. This allows detection of the
+ beginning of a new concealable region if there are two
+ consecutive regions with the same replacement character.
+ For an example use see $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim .
+
+
+synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()*
+ Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the
+ position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. Each item in
+ the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns.
+ The first item in the List is the outer region, following are
+ items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()|
+ returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a
+ transparent item.
+ This function is useful for debugging a syntax file.
+ Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: >
+ for id in synstack(line("."), col("."))
+ echo synIDattr(id, "name")
+ endfor
+< When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid
+ nothing is returned. The position just after the last
+ character in a line and the first column in an empty line are
+ valid positions.
+
+system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677*
+ Get the output of the shell command {expr}.
+ When {input} is given, this string is written to a file and
+ passed as stdin to the command. The string is written as-is,
+ you need to take care of using the correct line separators
+ yourself. Pipes are not used.
+ Note: Use |shellescape()| to escape special characters in a
+ command argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to
+ fail. The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may
+ also cause trouble.
+ This is not to be used for interactive commands.
+
+ The result is a String. Example: >
+ :let files = system("ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h')))
+
+< To make the result more system-independent, the shell output
+ is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and
+ <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems.
+ The command executed is constructed using several options:
+ 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote'
+ ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name).
+ For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for
+ concatenated commands.
+
+ The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a
+ CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least).
+
+ The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|.
+ This function will fail in |restricted-mode|.
+
+ Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may
+ make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail
+ when using a security agent application.
+ Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files.
+ Use |:checktime| to force a check.
+
+
+tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()*
+ The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the
+ buffer associated with each window in the current tab page.
+ {arg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. When
+ omitted the current tab page is used.
+ When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned.
+ To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: >
+ tablist = []
+ for i in range(tabpagenr('$'))
+ call extend(tablist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1))
+ endfor
+< Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window.
+
+
+tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+ tab page. The first tab page has number 1.
+ When the optional argument is "$", the number of the last tab
+ page is returned (the tab page count).
+ The number can be used with the |:tab| command.
+
+
+tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()*
+ Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}.
+ {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used.
+ {arg} is used like with |winnr()|:
+ - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is
+ the window which will be used when going to this tab page.
+ - When "$" the number of windows is returned.
+ - When "#" the previous window nr is returned.
+ Useful examples: >
+ tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1
+ tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4
+< When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned.
+
+ *tagfiles()*
+tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags
+ for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded.
+
+
+taglist({expr}) *taglist()*
+ Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}.
+ Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following
+ entries:
+ name Name of the tag.
+ filename Name of the file where the tag is
+ defined. It is either relative to the
+ current directory or a full path.
+ cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in
+ the file.
+ kind Type of the tag. The value for this
+ entry depends on the language specific
+ kind values. Only available when
+ using a tags file generated by
+ Exuberant ctags or hdrtag.
+ static A file specific tag. Refer to
+ |static-tag| for more information.
+ More entries may be present, depending on the content of the
+ tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature.
+ Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these
+ fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum"
+ may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is
+ contained in.
+
+ The ex-command 'cmd' can be either an ex search pattern, a
+ line number or a line number followed by a byte number.
+
+ If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned.
+
+ To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be
+ used in {expr}. Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information
+ about the tag search regular expression pattern.
+
+ Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is
+ located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of
+ the tags file generated by the different ctags tools.
+
+tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name*
+ The result is a String, which is the name of a file that
+ doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name
+ is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: >
+ :let tmpfile = tempname()
+ :exe "redir > " . tmpfile
+< For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|.
+ For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash'
+ option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'.
+
+
+tan({expr}) *tan()*
+ Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|
+ in the range [-inf, inf].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo tan(10)
+< 0.648361 >
+ :echo tan(-4.01)
+< -1.181502
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tanh({expr}) *tanh()*
+ Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the
+ range [-1, 1].
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo tanh(0.5)
+< 0.462117 >
+ :echo tanh(-1)
+< -0.761594
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+
+tolower({expr}) *tolower()*
+ The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase
+ characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to
+ the string).
+
+toupper({expr}) *toupper()*
+ The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase
+ characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to
+ the string).
+
+tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()*
+ The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters
+ which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that
+ position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in
+ {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr}
+ and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command.
+ This code also deals with multibyte characters properly.
+
+ Examples: >
+ echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT")
+< returns "Hello THere" >
+ echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}")
+< returns "{blob}"
+
+trunc({expr}) *trunc()*
+ Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or
+ equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero).
+ {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|.
+ Examples: >
+ echo trunc(1.456)
+< 1.0 >
+ echo trunc(-5.456)
+< -5.0 >
+ echo trunc(4.0)
+< 4.0
+ {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature}
+
+ *type()*
+type({expr}) The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}:
+ Number: 0
+ String: 1
+ Funcref: 2
+ List: 3
+ Dictionary: 4
+ Float: 5
+ To avoid the magic numbers it should be used this way: >
+ :if type(myvar) == type(0)
+ :if type(myvar) == type("")
+ :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr"))
+ :if type(myvar) == type([])
+ :if type(myvar) == type({})
+ :if type(myvar) == type(0.0)
+
+undofile({name}) *undofile()*
+ Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file
+ with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir'
+ option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if
+ the undo file exists.
+ {name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what
+ is used internally.
+ Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|.
+ When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always
+ returns an empty string.
+
+undotree() *undotree()*
+ Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with
+ the following items:
+ "seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used.
+ "seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in
+ the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last"
+ when some changes were undone.
+ "time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related
+ commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to
+ something readable.
+ "save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no
+ write yet.
+ "save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo
+ tree.
+ "synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced.
+ This happens when waiting from input from the
+ user. See |undo-blocks|.
+ "entries" A list of dictionaries with information about
+ undo blocks.
+
+ The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item.
+ Each List item is a Dictionary with these items:
+ "seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in
+ |:undolist|.
+ "time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use
+ |strftime()| to convert to something readable.
+ "newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one
+ that was added. This marks the last change
+ and where further changes will be added.
+ "curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one
+ that was undone. This marks the current
+ position in the undo tree, the block that will
+ be used by a redo command. When nothing was
+ undone after the last change this item will
+ not appear anywhere.
+ "save" Only appears on the last block before a file
+ write. The number is the write count. The
+ first write has number 1, the last one the
+ "save_last" mentioned above.
+ "alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo
+ blocks. Each item may again have an "alt"
+ item.
+
+values({dict}) *values()*
+ Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is
+ in arbitrary order.
+
+
+virtcol({expr}) *virtcol()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file
+ position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position
+ occupied by the character at that position, when the screen
+ would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the
+ position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of
+ the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts'
+ set to 8, it returns 8.
+ For the byte position use |col()|.
+ For the use of {expr} see |col()|.
+ When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where
+ "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the
+ character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last
+ character.
+ When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position
+ beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'|
+ The accepted positions are:
+ . the cursor position
+ $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the
+ number of displayed characters in the cursor line
+ plus one)
+ 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is
+ returned)
+ Note that only marks in the current file can be used.
+ Examples: >
+ virtcol(".") with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5
+ virtcol("$") with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9
+ virtcol("'t") with text " there", with 't at 'h', returns 6
+< The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error.
+ A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of
+ all lines: >
+ echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])"))
+
+
+visualmode([expr]) *visualmode()*
+ The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode
+ used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty
+ string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v",
+ "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for
+ character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode
+ respectively.
+ Example: >
+ :exe "normal " . visualmode()
+< This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful
+ in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the
+ Visual mode that was used.
+ If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode
+ (e.g., in a |:vmap|).
+ *non-zero-arg*
+ If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or
+ a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and
+ the old value is returned. Note that " " and "0" are also
+ non-empty strings, thus cause the mode to be cleared. A List,
+ Dictionary or Float is not a Number or String, thus does not
+ cause the mode to be cleared.
+
+ *winbufnr()*
+winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer
+ associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of
+ the buffer in the current window is returned. When window
+ {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+ Example: >
+ :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0))
+<
+ *wincol()*
+wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the
+ cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the
+ left side of the window. The leftmost column is one.
+
+winheight({nr}) *winheight()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}.
+ When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is
+ returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+ An existing window always has a height of zero or more.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines."
+<
+ *winline()*
+winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor
+ in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of
+ the window. The first line is one.
+ If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated
+ first, this may cause a scroll.
+
+ *winnr()*
+winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current
+ window. The top window has number 1.
+ When the optional argument is "$", the number of the
+ last window is returned (the window count).
+ When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last
+ accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to).
+ If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0
+ is returned.
+ The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w"
+ |:wincmd|.
+ Also see |tabpagewinnr()|.
+
+ *winrestcmd()*
+winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore
+ the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows
+ are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is
+ unchanged.
+ Example: >
+ :let cmd = winrestcmd()
+ :call MessWithWindowSizes()
+ :exe cmd
+<
+ *winrestview()*
+winrestview({dict})
+ Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore
+ the view of the current window.
+ If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable.
+ If the window size changed the result won't be the same.
+
+ *winsaveview()*
+winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore
+ the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to
+ restore the view.
+ This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the
+ buffer and you want to go back to the original view.
+ This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable'
+ option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are
+ not opened when moving around.
+ The return value includes:
+ lnum cursor line number
+ col cursor column
+ coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit'
+ curswant column for vertical movement
+ topline first line in the window
+ topfill filler lines, only in diff mode
+ leftcol first column displayed
+ skipcol columns skipped
+ Note that no option values are saved.
+
+
+winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()*
+ The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}.
+ When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is
+ returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned.
+ An existing window always has a width of zero or more.
+ Examples: >
+ :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns."
+ :if winwidth(0) <= 50
+ : exe "normal 50\<C-W>|"
+ :endif
+<
+ *writefile()*
+writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}])
+ Write |List| {list} to file {fname}. Each list item is
+ separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String or
+ Number.
+ When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: There will
+ not be a NL after the last list item. An empty item at the
+ end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL.
+ All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character.
+ Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list}
+ to writefile().
+ An existing file is overwritten, if possible.
+ When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an
+ error message if the file can't be created or when writing
+ fails.
+ Also see |readfile()|.
+ To copy a file byte for byte: >
+ :let fl = readfile("foo", "b")
+ :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b")
+<
+
+ *feature-list*
+There are three types of features:
+1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim
+ was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: >
+ :if has("cindent")
+2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met.
+ Example: >
+ :if has("gui_running")
+< *has-patch*
+3. Included patches. First check |v:version| for the version of Vim.
+ Then the "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been included for
+ this version. Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): >
+ :if v:version > 602 || v:version == 602 && has("patch148")
+< Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is
+ included.
+
+all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled.
+amiga Amiga version of Vim.
+arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|.
+arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga).
+autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. |autocommand|
+balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support.
+balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons.
+beos BeOS version of Vim.
+browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will
+ work.
+builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals.
+byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline'
+cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support.
+clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|.
+clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support.
+cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support.
+cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support.
+cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support.
+comments Compiled with |'comments'| support.
+compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible.
+cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|.
+cscope Compiled with |cscope| support.
+debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined.
+dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support.
+dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support.
+diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support.
+digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs.
+dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|.
+dos16 16 bits DOS version of Vim.
+dos32 32 bits DOS (DJGPP) version of Vim.
+ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set.
+emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags.
+eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always
+ true, of course!
+ex_extra Compiled with extra Ex commands |+ex_extra|.
+extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and
+ |'hlsearch'|
+farsi Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|.
+file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>|
+filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell
+ read/write/filter commands
+find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches
+ |+find_in_path|.
+float Compiled with support for |Float|.
+fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga, MS-DOS, and
+ Windows this is not present).
+folding Compiled with |folding| support.
+footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer|
+fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system().
+gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang|
+gui Compiled with GUI enabled.
+gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI.
+gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version).
+gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined).
+gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI.
+gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI.
+gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI.
+gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon.
+gui_win32 Compiled with MS Windows Win32 GUI.
+gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1)
+hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul|
+iconv Can use iconv() for conversion.
+insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in
+ Insert mode.
+jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support.
+keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support.
+langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support.
+libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support.
+linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat' and 'showbreak'
+ support.
+lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting.
+listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files|
+ and the argument list |arglist|.
+localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local|
+lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|.
+mac Macintosh version of Vim.
+macunix Macintosh version of Vim, using Unix files (OS-X).
+menu Compiled with support for |:menu|.
+mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|.
+modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers|
+mouse Compiled with support mouse.
+mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse.
+mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse)
+mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse.
+mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse.
+mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse)
+mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse.
+mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'.
+multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding'
+multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding.
+multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method.
+multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages.
+mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|.
+netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected.
+netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|.
+ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32.
+os2 OS/2 version of Vim.
+osfiletype Compiled with support for osfiletypes |+osfiletype|
+path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags'
+perl Compiled with Perl interface.
+persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history.
+postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing.
+printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support.
+profile Compiled with |:profile| support.
+python Compiled with Python interface.
+qnx QNX version of Vim.
+quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support.
+reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support.
+rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support.
+ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|.
+scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support.
+showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support.
+signs Compiled with |:sign| support.
+smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support.
+sniff Compiled with SNiFF interface support.
+spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|.
+startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support.
+statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat'
+ and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'.
+sun_workshop Compiled with support for Sun |workshop|.
+syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|.
+syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the
+ current buffer.
+system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec().
+tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files
+ |tag-binary-search|.
+tag_old_static Compiled with support for old static tags
+ |tag-old-static|.
+tag_any_white Compiled with support for any white characters in tags
+ files |tag-any-white|.
+tcl Compiled with Tcl interface.
+terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap.
+termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|.
+textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|.
+tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap
+ or terminfo file.
+title Compiled with window title support |'title'|.
+toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|.
+unix Unix version of Vim.
+user_commands User-defined commands.
+vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|.
+vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup|
+viminfo Compiled with viminfo support.
+virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option.
+visual Compiled with Visual mode.
+visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands.
+ |blockwise-operators|.
+vms VMS version of Vim.
+vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands.
+wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option.
+wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option.
+win16 Win16 version of Vim (MS-Windows 3.1).
+win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95/98/ME/NT/2000/XP).
+win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin)
+win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit).
+win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME.
+winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option.
+windows Compiled with support for more than one window.
+writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on.
+xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|.
+xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|.
+xsmp Compiled with X session management support.
+xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support.
+xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard.
+xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the
+ xterm screen.
+x11 Compiled with X11 support.
+
+ *string-match*
+Matching a pattern in a String
+
+A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in
+the buffer lines. When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost
+everything works in the same way. The difference is that a String is handled
+like it is one line. When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a
+line break for the pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or
+with ".". Example: >
+ :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx"
+ :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..")
+ aa
+ xx
+ :echo matchstr(a, "a.x")
+ a
+ x
+
+Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and
+"$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a
+"\n".
+
+==============================================================================
+5. Defining functions *user-functions*
+
+New functions can be defined. These can be called just like builtin
+functions. The function executes a sequence of Ex commands. Normal mode
+commands can be executed with the |:normal| command.
+
+The function name must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid confusion with
+builtin functions. To prevent from using the same name in different scripts
+avoid obvious, short names. A good habit is to start the function name with
+the name of the script, e.g., "HTMLcolor()".
+
+It's also possible to use curly braces, see |curly-braces-names|. And the
+|autoload| facility is useful to define a function only when it's called.
+
+ *local-function*
+A function local to a script must start with "s:". A local script function
+can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands
+and autocommands defined in the script. It is also possible to call the
+function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used
+instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script.
+
+ *:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123*
+:fu[nction] List all functions and their arguments.
+
+:fu[nction] {name} List function {name}.
+ {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+ |Funcref|: >
+ :function dict.init
+
+:fu[nction] /{pattern} List functions with a name matching {pattern}.
+ Example that lists all functions ending with "File": >
+ :function /File$
+<
+ *:function-verbose*
+When 'verbose' is non-zero, listing a function will also display where it was
+last defined. Example: >
+
+ :verbose function SetFileTypeSH
+ function SetFileTypeSH(name)
+ Last set from /usr/share/vim/vim-7.0/filetype.vim
+<
+See |:verbose-cmd| for more information.
+
+ *E124* *E125*
+:fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict]
+ Define a new function by the name {name}. The name
+ must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and
+ must start with a capital or "s:" (see above).
+
+ {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+ |Funcref|: >
+ :function dict.init(arg)
+< "dict" must be an existing dictionary. The entry
+ "init" is added if it didn't exist yet. Otherwise [!]
+ is required to overwrite an existing function. The
+ result is a |Funcref| to a numbered function. The
+ function can only be used with a |Funcref| and will be
+ deleted if there are no more references to it.
+ *E127* *E122*
+ When a function by this name already exists and [!] is
+ not used an error message is given. When [!] is used,
+ an existing function is silently replaced. Unless it
+ is currently being executed, that is an error.
+
+ For the {arguments} see |function-argument|.
+
+ *a:firstline* *a:lastline*
+ When the [range] argument is added, the function is
+ expected to take care of a range itself. The range is
+ passed as "a:firstline" and "a:lastline". If [range]
+ is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for
+ each line in the range, with the cursor on the start
+ of each line. See |function-range-example|.
+
+ When the [abort] argument is added, the function will
+ abort as soon as an error is detected.
+
+ When the [dict] argument is added, the function must
+ be invoked through an entry in a |Dictionary|. The
+ local variable "self" will then be set to the
+ dictionary. See |Dictionary-function|.
+
+ *function-search-undo*
+ The last used search pattern and the redo command "."
+ will not be changed by the function. This also
+ implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone
+ when the function returns.
+
+ *:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193*
+:endf[unction] The end of a function definition. Must be on a line
+ by its own, without other commands.
+
+ *:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131*
+:delf[unction] {name} Delete function {name}.
+ {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a
+ |Funcref|: >
+ :delfunc dict.init
+< This will remove the "init" entry from "dict". The
+ function is deleted if there are no more references to
+ it.
+ *:retu* *:return* *E133*
+:retu[rn] [expr] Return from a function. When "[expr]" is given, it is
+ evaluated and returned as the result of the function.
+ If "[expr]" is not given, the number 0 is returned.
+ When a function ends without an explicit ":return",
+ the number 0 is returned.
+ Note that there is no check for unreachable lines,
+ thus there is no warning if commands follow ":return".
+
+ If the ":return" is used after a |:try| but before the
+ matching |:finally| (if present), the commands
+ following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry|
+ are executed first. This process applies to all
+ nested ":try"s inside the function. The function
+ returns at the outermost ":endtry".
+
+ *function-argument* *a:var*
+An argument can be defined by giving its name. In the function this can then
+be used as "a:name" ("a:" for argument).
+ *a:0* *a:1* *a:000* *E740* *...*
+Up to 20 arguments can be given, separated by commas. After the named
+arguments an argument "..." can be specified, which means that more arguments
+may optionally be following. In the function the extra arguments can be used
+as "a:1", "a:2", etc. "a:0" is set to the number of extra arguments (which
+can be 0). "a:000" is set to a |List| that contains these arguments. Note
+that "a:1" is the same as "a:000[0]".
+ *E742*
+The a: scope and the variables in it cannot be changed, they are fixed.
+However, if a |List| or |Dictionary| is used, you can change their contents.
+Thus you can pass a |List| to a function and have the function add an item to
+it. If you want to make sure the function cannot change a |List| or
+|Dictionary| use |:lockvar|.
+
+When not using "...", the number of arguments in a function call must be equal
+to the number of named arguments. When using "...", the number of arguments
+may be larger.
+
+It is also possible to define a function without any arguments. You must
+still supply the () then. The body of the function follows in the next lines,
+until the matching |:endfunction|. It is allowed to define another function
+inside a function body.
+
+ *local-variables*
+Inside a function variables can be used. These are local variables, which
+will disappear when the function returns. Global variables need to be
+accessed with "g:".
+
+Example: >
+ :function Table(title, ...)
+ : echohl Title
+ : echo a:title
+ : echohl None
+ : echo a:0 . " items:"
+ : for s in a:000
+ : echon ' ' . s
+ : endfor
+ :endfunction
+
+This function can then be called with: >
+ call Table("Table", "line1", "line2")
+ call Table("Empty Table")
+
+To return more than one value, return a |List|: >
+ :function Compute(n1, n2)
+ : if a:n2 == 0
+ : return ["fail", 0]
+ : endif
+ : return ["ok", a:n1 / a:n2]
+ :endfunction
+
+This function can then be called with: >
+ :let [success, div] = Compute(102, 6)
+ :if success == "ok"
+ : echo div
+ :endif
+<
+ *:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117*
+:[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments])
+ Call a function. The name of the function and its arguments
+ are as specified with |:function|. Up to 20 arguments can be
+ used. The returned value is discarded.
+ Without a range and for functions that accept a range, the
+ function is called once. When a range is given the cursor is
+ positioned at the start of the first line before executing the
+ function.
+ When a range is given and the function doesn't handle it
+ itself, the function is executed for each line in the range,
+ with the cursor in the first column of that line. The cursor
+ is left at the last line (possibly moved by the last function
+ call). The arguments are re-evaluated for each line. Thus
+ this works:
+ *function-range-example* >
+ :function Mynumber(arg)
+ : echo line(".") . " " . a:arg
+ :endfunction
+ :1,5call Mynumber(getline("."))
+<
+ The "a:firstline" and "a:lastline" are defined anyway, they
+ can be used to do something different at the start or end of
+ the range.
+
+ Example of a function that handles the range itself: >
+
+ :function Cont() range
+ : execute (a:firstline + 1) . "," . a:lastline . 's/^/\t\\ '
+ :endfunction
+ :4,8call Cont()
+<
+ This function inserts the continuation character "\" in front
+ of all the lines in the range, except the first one.
+
+ When the function returns a composite value it can be further
+ dereferenced, but the range will not be used then. Example: >
+ :4,8call GetDict().method()
+< Here GetDict() gets the range but method() does not.
+
+ *E132*
+The recursiveness of user functions is restricted with the |'maxfuncdepth'|
+option.
+
+
+AUTOMATICALLY LOADING FUNCTIONS ~
+ *autoload-functions*
+When using many or large functions, it's possible to automatically define them
+only when they are used. There are two methods: with an autocommand and with
+the "autoload" directory in 'runtimepath'.
+
+
+Using an autocommand ~
+
+This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.14|.
+
+The autocommand is useful if you have a plugin that is a long Vim script file.
+You can define the autocommand and quickly quit the script with |:finish|.
+That makes Vim startup faster. The autocommand should then load the same file
+again, setting a variable to skip the |:finish| command.
+
+Use the FuncUndefined autocommand event with a pattern that matches the
+function(s) to be defined. Example: >
+
+ :au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim
+
+The file "~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim" should then define functions that start with
+"BufNet". Also see |FuncUndefined|.
+
+
+Using an autoload script ~
+ *autoload* *E746*
+This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.15|.
+
+Using a script in the "autoload" directory is simpler, but requires using
+exactly the right file name. A function that can be autoloaded has a name
+like this: >
+
+ :call filename#funcname()
+
+When such a function is called, and it is not defined yet, Vim will search the
+"autoload" directories in 'runtimepath' for a script file called
+"filename.vim". For example "~/.vim/autoload/filename.vim". That file should
+then define the function like this: >
+
+ function filename#funcname()
+ echo "Done!"
+ endfunction
+
+The file name and the name used before the # in the function must match
+exactly, and the defined function must have the name exactly as it will be
+called.
+
+It is possible to use subdirectories. Every # in the function name works like
+a path separator. Thus when calling a function: >
+
+ :call foo#bar#func()
+
+Vim will look for the file "autoload/foo/bar.vim" in 'runtimepath'.
+
+This also works when reading a variable that has not been set yet: >
+
+ :let l = foo#bar#lvar
+
+However, when the autoload script was already loaded it won't be loaded again
+for an unknown variable.
+
+When assigning a value to such a variable nothing special happens. This can
+be used to pass settings to the autoload script before it's loaded: >
+
+ :let foo#bar#toggle = 1
+ :call foo#bar#func()
+
+Note that when you make a mistake and call a function that is supposed to be
+defined in an autoload script, but the script doesn't actually define the
+function, the script will be sourced every time you try to call the function.
+And you will get an error message every time.
+
+Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the
+other and vice versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work.
+Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel.
+
+Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the
+|vimball| utility. Also read the user manual |distribute-script|.
+
+==============================================================================
+6. Curly braces names *curly-braces-names*
+
+Wherever you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" variable.
+This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions wrapped in braces
+{} like this: >
+ my_{adjective}_variable
+
+When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts
+that in place of the expression, and re-interprets the whole as a variable
+name. So in the above example, if the variable "adjective" was set to
+"noisy", then the reference would be to "my_noisy_variable", whereas if
+"adjective" was set to "quiet", then it would be to "my_quiet_variable".
+
+One application for this is to create a set of variables governed by an option
+value. For example, the statement >
+ echo my_{&background}_message
+
+would output the contents of "my_dark_message" or "my_light_message" depending
+on the current value of 'background'.
+
+You can use multiple brace pairs: >
+ echo my_{adverb}_{adjective}_message
+..or even nest them: >
+ echo my_{ad{end_of_word}}_message
+where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective".
+
+However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single
+variable name, e.g. this is invalid: >
+ :let foo='a + b'
+ :echo c{foo}d
+.. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name.
+
+ *curly-braces-function-names*
+You can call and define functions by an evaluated name in a similar way.
+Example: >
+ :let func_end='whizz'
+ :call my_func_{func_end}(parameter)
+
+This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)".
+
+==============================================================================
+7. Commands *expression-commands*
+
+:let {var-name} = {expr1} *:let* *E18*
+ Set internal variable {var-name} to the result of the
+ expression {expr1}. The variable will get the type
+ from the {expr}. If {var-name} didn't exist yet, it
+ is created.
+
+:let {var-name}[{idx}] = {expr1} *E689*
+ Set a list item to the result of the expression
+ {expr1}. {var-name} must refer to a list and {idx}
+ must be a valid index in that list. For nested list
+ the index can be repeated.
+ This cannot be used to add an item to a |List|.
+ This cannot be used to set a byte in a String. You
+ can do that like this: >
+ :let var = var[0:2] . 'X' . var[4:]
+<
+ *E711* *E719*
+:let {var-name}[{idx1}:{idx2}] = {expr1} *E708* *E709* *E710*
+ Set a sequence of items in a |List| to the result of
+ the expression {expr1}, which must be a list with the
+ correct number of items.
+ {idx1} can be omitted, zero is used instead.
+ {idx2} can be omitted, meaning the end of the list.
+ When the selected range of items is partly past the
+ end of the list, items will be added.
+
+ *:let+=* *:let-=* *:let.=* *E734*
+:let {var} += {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} + {expr1}".
+:let {var} -= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} - {expr1}".
+:let {var} .= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} . {expr1}".
+ These fail if {var} was not set yet and when the type
+ of {var} and {expr1} don't fit the operator.
+
+
+:let ${env-name} = {expr1} *:let-environment* *:let-$*
+ Set environment variable {env-name} to the result of
+ the expression {expr1}. The type is always String.
+:let ${env-name} .= {expr1}
+ Append {expr1} to the environment variable {env-name}.
+ If the environment variable didn't exist yet this
+ works like "=".
+
+:let @{reg-name} = {expr1} *:let-register* *:let-@*
+ Write the result of the expression {expr1} in register
+ {reg-name}. {reg-name} must be a single letter, and
+ must be the name of a writable register (see
+ |registers|). "@@" can be used for the unnamed
+ register, "@/" for the search pattern.
+ If the result of {expr1} ends in a <CR> or <NL>, the
+ register will be linewise, otherwise it will be set to
+ characterwise.
+ This can be used to clear the last search pattern: >
+ :let @/ = ""
+< This is different from searching for an empty string,
+ that would match everywhere.
+
+:let @{reg-name} .= {expr1}
+ Append {expr1} to register {reg-name}. If the
+ register was empty it's like setting it to {expr1}.
+
+:let &{option-name} = {expr1} *:let-option* *:let-&*
+ Set option {option-name} to the result of the
+ expression {expr1}. A String or Number value is
+ always converted to the type of the option.
+ For an option local to a window or buffer the effect
+ is just like using the |:set| command: both the local
+ value and the global value are changed.
+ Example: >
+ :let &path = &path . ',/usr/local/include'
+
+:let &{option-name} .= {expr1}
+ For a string option: Append {expr1} to the value.
+ Does not insert a comma like |:set+=|.
+
+:let &{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &{option-name} -= {expr1}
+ For a number or boolean option: Add or subtract
+ {expr1}.
+
+:let &l:{option-name} = {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} .= {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &l:{option-name} -= {expr1}
+ Like above, but only set the local value of an option
+ (if there is one). Works like |:setlocal|.
+
+:let &g:{option-name} = {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} .= {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} += {expr1}
+:let &g:{option-name} -= {expr1}
+ Like above, but only set the global value of an option
+ (if there is one). Works like |:setglobal|.
+
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] = {expr1} *:let-unpack* *E687* *E688*
+ {expr1} must evaluate to a |List|. The first item in
+ the list is assigned to {name1}, the second item to
+ {name2}, etc.
+ The number of names must match the number of items in
+ the |List|.
+ Each name can be one of the items of the ":let"
+ command as mentioned above.
+ Example: >
+ :let [s, item] = GetItem(s)
+< Detail: {expr1} is evaluated first, then the
+ assignments are done in sequence. This matters if
+ {name2} depends on {name1}. Example: >
+ :let x = [0, 1]
+ :let i = 0
+ :let [i, x[i]] = [1, 2]
+ :echo x
+< The result is [0, 2].
+
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] .= {expr1}
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] += {expr1}
+:let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] -= {expr1}
+ Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
+ |List| item.
+
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] = {expr1}
+ Like |:let-unpack| above, but the |List| may have more
+ items than there are names. A list of the remaining
+ items is assigned to {lastname}. If there are no
+ remaining items {lastname} is set to an empty list.
+ Example: >
+ :let [a, b; rest] = ["aval", "bval", 3, 4]
+<
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] .= {expr1}
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] += {expr1}
+:let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1}
+ Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each
+ |List| item.
+
+ *E121*
+:let {var-name} .. List the value of variable {var-name}. Multiple
+ variable names may be given. Special names recognized
+ here: *E738*
+ g: global variables
+ b: local buffer variables
+ w: local window variables
+ t: local tab page variables
+ s: script-local variables
+ l: local function variables
+ v: Vim variables.
+
+:let List the values of all variables. The type of the
+ variable is indicated before the value:
+ <nothing> String
+ # Number
+ * Funcref
+
+
+:unl[et][!] {name} ... *:unlet* *:unl* *E108* *E795*
+ Remove the internal variable {name}. Several variable
+ names can be given, they are all removed. The name
+ may also be a |List| or |Dictionary| item.
+ With [!] no error message is given for non-existing
+ variables.
+ One or more items from a |List| can be removed: >
+ :unlet list[3] " remove fourth item
+ :unlet list[3:] " remove fourth item to last
+< One item from a |Dictionary| can be removed at a time: >
+ :unlet dict['two']
+ :unlet dict.two
+< This is especially useful to clean up used global
+ variables and script-local variables (these are not
+ deleted when the script ends). Function-local
+ variables are automatically deleted when the function
+ ends.
+
+:lockv[ar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:lockvar* *:lockv*
+ Lock the internal variable {name}. Locking means that
+ it can no longer be changed (until it is unlocked).
+ A locked variable can be deleted: >
+ :lockvar v
+ :let v = 'asdf' " fails!
+ :unlet v
+< *E741*
+ If you try to change a locked variable you get an
+ error message: "E741: Value of {name} is locked"
+
+ [depth] is relevant when locking a |List| or
+ |Dictionary|. It specifies how deep the locking goes:
+ 1 Lock the |List| or |Dictionary| itself,
+ cannot add or remove items, but can
+ still change their values.
+ 2 Also lock the values, cannot change
+ the items. If an item is a |List| or
+ |Dictionary|, cannot add or remove
+ items, but can still change the
+ values.
+ 3 Like 2 but for the |List| /
+ |Dictionary| in the |List| /
+ |Dictionary|, one level deeper.
+ The default [depth] is 2, thus when {name} is a |List|
+ or |Dictionary| the values cannot be changed.
+ *E743*
+ For unlimited depth use [!] and omit [depth].
+ However, there is a maximum depth of 100 to catch
+ loops.
+
+ Note that when two variables refer to the same |List|
+ and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be
+ locked when used through the other variable.
+ Example: >
+ :let l = [0, 1, 2, 3]
+ :let cl = l
+ :lockvar l
+ :let cl[1] = 99 " won't work!
+< You may want to make a copy of a list to avoid this.
+ See |deepcopy()|.
+
+
+:unlo[ckvar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:unlockvar* *:unlo*
+ Unlock the internal variable {name}. Does the
+ opposite of |:lockvar|.
+
+
+:if {expr1} *:if* *:endif* *:en* *E171* *E579* *E580*
+:en[dif] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
+ or ":endif" if {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
+
+ From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in
+ between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored. These two
+ commands were just to allow for future expansions in a
+ backwards compatible way. Nesting was allowed. Note
+ that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else"
+ part was not executed either.
+
+ You can use this to remain compatible with older
+ versions: >
+ :if version >= 500
+ : version-5-specific-commands
+ :endif
+< The commands still need to be parsed to find the
+ "endif". Sometimes an older Vim has a problem with a
+ new command. For example, ":silent" is recognized as
+ a ":substitute" command. In that case ":execute" can
+ avoid problems: >
+ :if version >= 600
+ : execute "silent 1,$delete"
+ :endif
+<
+ NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
+ properly in between ":if" and ":endif".
+
+ *:else* *:el* *E581* *E583*
+:el[se] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else"
+ or ":endif" if they previously were not being
+ executed.
+
+ *:elseif* *:elsei* *E582* *E584*
+:elsei[f] {expr1} Short for ":else" ":if", with the addition that there
+ is no extra ":endif".
+
+:wh[ile] {expr1} *:while* *:endwhile* *:wh* *:endw*
+ *E170* *E585* *E588* *E733*
+:endw[hile] Repeat the commands between ":while" and ":endwhile",
+ as long as {expr1} evaluates to non-zero.
+ When an error is detected from a command inside the
+ loop, execution continues after the "endwhile".
+ Example: >
+ :let lnum = 1
+ :while lnum <= line("$")
+ :call FixLine(lnum)
+ :let lnum = lnum + 1
+ :endwhile
+<
+ NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work
+ properly inside a ":while" and ":for" loop.
+
+:for {var} in {list} *:for* *E690* *E732*
+:endfo[r] *:endfo* *:endfor*
+ Repeat the commands between ":for" and ":endfor" for
+ each item in {list}. Variable {var} is set to the
+ value of each item.
+ When an error is detected for a command inside the
+ loop, execution continues after the "endfor".
+ Changing {list} inside the loop affects what items are
+ used. Make a copy if this is unwanted: >
+ :for item in copy(mylist)
+< When not making a copy, Vim stores a reference to the
+ next item in the list, before executing the commands
+ with the current item. Thus the current item can be
+ removed without effect. Removing any later item means
+ it will not be found. Thus the following example
+ works (an inefficient way to make a list empty): >
+ for item in mylist
+ call remove(mylist, 0)
+ endfor
+< Note that reordering the list (e.g., with sort() or
+ reverse()) may have unexpected effects.
+ Note that the type of each list item should be
+ identical to avoid errors for the type of {var}
+ changing. Unlet the variable at the end of the loop
+ to allow multiple item types: >
+ for item in ["foo", ["bar"]]
+ echo item
+ unlet item " E706 without this
+ endfor
+
+:for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist}
+:endfo[r]
+ Like ":for" above, but each item in {listlist} must be
+ a list, of which each item is assigned to {var1},
+ {var2}, etc. Example: >
+ :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 5], [3, 8]]
+ :echo getline(lnum)[col]
+ :endfor
+<
+ *:continue* *:con* *E586*
+:con[tinue] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, jumps back
+ to the start of the loop.
+ If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
+ before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
+ commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
+ |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to
+ all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost
+ ":endtry" then jumps back to the start of the loop.
+
+ *:break* *:brea* *E587*
+:brea[k] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, skips to
+ the command after the matching ":endwhile" or
+ ":endfor".
+ If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but
+ before the matching |:finally| (if present), the
+ commands following the ":finally" up to the matching
+ |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to
+ all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost
+ ":endtry" then jumps to the command after the loop.
+
+:try *:try* *:endt* *:endtry* *E600* *E601* *E602*
+:endt[ry] Change the error handling for the commands between
+ ":try" and ":endtry" including everything being
+ executed across ":source" commands, function calls,
+ or autocommand invocations.
+
+ When an error or interrupt is detected and there is
+ a |:finally| command following, execution continues
+ after the ":finally". Otherwise, or when the
+ ":endtry" is reached thereafter, the next
+ (dynamically) surrounding ":try" is checked for
+ a corresponding ":finally" etc. Then the script
+ processing is terminated. (Whether a function
+ definition has an "abort" argument does not matter.)
+ Example: >
+ :try | edit too much | finally | echo "cleanup" | endtry
+ :echo "impossible" " not reached, script terminated above
+<
+ Moreover, an error or interrupt (dynamically) inside
+ ":try" and ":endtry" is converted to an exception. It
+ can be caught as if it were thrown by a |:throw|
+ command (see |:catch|). In this case, the script
+ processing is not terminated.
+
+ The value "Vim:Interrupt" is used for an interrupt
+ exception. An error in a Vim command is converted
+ to a value of the form "Vim({command}):{errmsg}",
+ other errors are converted to a value of the form
+ "Vim:{errmsg}". {command} is the full command name,
+ and {errmsg} is the message that is displayed if the
+ error exception is not caught, always beginning with
+ the error number.
+ Examples: >
+ :try | sleep 100 | catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | endtry
+ :try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry
+<
+ *:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605*
+:cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next |:catch|,
+ |:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same
+ |:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception
+ matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet
+ been caught by a previous ":catch". Otherwise, these
+ commands are skipped.
+ When {pattern} is omitted all errors are caught.
+ Examples: >
+ :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ " catch interrupts (CTRL-C)
+ :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/ " catch all Vim errors
+ :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:/ " catch errors and interrupts
+ :catch /^Vim(write):/ " catch all errors in :write
+ :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E123/ " catch error E123
+ :catch /my-exception/ " catch user exception
+ :catch /.*/ " catch everything
+ :catch " same as /.*/
+<
+ Another character can be used instead of / around the
+ {pattern}, so long as it does not have a special
+ meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside
+ {pattern}.
+ NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of
+ an error message because it may vary in different
+ locales.
+
+ *:fina* *:finally* *E606* *E607*
+:fina[lly] The following commands until the matching |:endtry|
+ are executed whenever the part between the matching
+ |:try| and the ":finally" is left: either by falling
+ through to the ":finally" or by a |:continue|,
+ |:break|, |:finish|, or |:return|, or by an error or
+ interrupt or exception (see |:throw|).
+
+ *:th* *:throw* *E608*
+:th[row] {expr1} The {expr1} is evaluated and thrown as an exception.
+ If the ":throw" is used after a |:try| but before the
+ first corresponding |:catch|, commands are skipped
+ until the first ":catch" matching {expr1} is reached.
+ If there is no such ":catch" or if the ":throw" is
+ used after a ":catch" but before the |:finally|, the
+ commands following the ":finally" (if present) up to
+ the matching |:endtry| are executed. If the ":throw"
+ is after the ":finally", commands up to the ":endtry"
+ are skipped. At the ":endtry", this process applies
+ again for the next dynamically surrounding ":try"
+ (which may be found in a calling function or sourcing
+ script), until a matching ":catch" has been found.
+ If the exception is not caught, the command processing
+ is terminated.
+ Example: >
+ :try | throw "oops" | catch /^oo/ | echo "caught" | endtry
+<
+
+ *:ec* *:echo*
+:ec[ho] {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, with a space in between. The
+ first {expr1} starts on a new line.
+ Also see |:comment|.
+ Use "\n" to start a new line. Use "\r" to move the
+ cursor to the first column.
+ Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+ Cannot be followed by a comment.
+ Example: >
+ :echo "the value of 'shell' is" &shell
+< *:echo-redraw*
+ A later redraw may make the message disappear again.
+ And since Vim mostly postpones redrawing until it's
+ finished with a sequence of commands this happens
+ quite often. To avoid that a command from before the
+ ":echo" causes a redraw afterwards (redraws are often
+ postponed until you type something), force a redraw
+ with the |:redraw| command. Example: >
+ :new | redraw | echo "there is a new window"
+<
+ *:echon*
+:echon {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, without anything added. Also see
+ |:comment|.
+ Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+ Cannot be followed by a comment.
+ Example: >
+ :echon "the value of 'shell' is " &shell
+<
+ Note the difference between using ":echo", which is a
+ Vim command, and ":!echo", which is an external shell
+ command: >
+ :!echo % --> filename
+< The arguments of ":!" are expanded, see |:_%|. >
+ :!echo "%" --> filename or "filename"
+< Like the previous example. Whether you see the double
+ quotes or not depends on your 'shell'. >
+ :echo % --> nothing
+< The '%' is an illegal character in an expression. >
+ :echo "%" --> %
+< This just echoes the '%' character. >
+ :echo expand("%") --> filename
+< This calls the expand() function to expand the '%'.
+
+ *:echoh* *:echohl*
+:echoh[l] {name} Use the highlight group {name} for the following
+ |:echo|, |:echon| and |:echomsg| commands. Also used
+ for the |input()| prompt. Example: >
+ :echohl WarningMsg | echo "Don't panic!" | echohl None
+< Don't forget to set the group back to "None",
+ otherwise all following echo's will be highlighted.
+
+ *:echom* *:echomsg*
+:echom[sg] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as a true message, saving the
+ message in the |message-history|.
+ Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
+ |:echo| command. But unprintable characters are
+ displayed, not interpreted.
+ The parsing works slightly different from |:echo|,
+ more like |:execute|. All the expressions are first
+ evaluated and concatenated before echoing anything.
+ The expressions must evaluate to a Number or String, a
+ Dictionary or List causes an error.
+ Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command.
+ Example: >
+ :echomsg "It's a Zizzer Zazzer Zuzz, as you can plainly see."
+< See |:echo-redraw| to avoid the message disappearing
+ when the screen is redrawn.
+ *:echoe* *:echoerr*
+:echoe[rr] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as an error message, saving the
+ message in the |message-history|. When used in a
+ script or function the line number will be added.
+ Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the
+ :echo command. When used inside a try conditional,
+ the message is raised as an error exception instead
+ (see |try-echoerr|).
+ Example: >
+ :echoerr "This script just failed!"
+< If you just want a highlighted message use |:echohl|.
+ And to get a beep: >
+ :exe "normal \<Esc>"
+<
+ *:exe* *:execute*
+:exe[cute] {expr1} .. Executes the string that results from the evaluation
+ of {expr1} as an Ex command.
+ Multiple arguments are concatenated, with a space in
+ between. To avoid the extra space use the "."
+ operator to concatenate strings into one argument.
+ {expr1} is used as the processed command, command line
+ editing keys are not recognized.
+ Cannot be followed by a comment.
+ Examples: >
+ :execute "buffer" nextbuf
+ :execute "normal" count . "w"
+<
+ ":execute" can be used to append a command to commands
+ that don't accept a '|'. Example: >
+ :execute '!ls' | echo "theend"
+
+< ":execute" is also a nice way to avoid having to type
+ control characters in a Vim script for a ":normal"
+ command: >
+ :execute "normal ixxx\<Esc>"
+< This has an <Esc> character, see |expr-string|.
+
+ Be careful to correctly escape special characters in
+ file names. The |fnameescape()| function can be used
+ for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands.
+ Examples: >
+ :execute "e " . fnameescape(filename)
+ :execute "!ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'), 1)
+<
+ Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but
+ you cannot start or end a "while", "for" or "if"
+ command. Thus this is illegal: >
+ :execute 'while i > 5'
+ :execute 'echo "test" | break'
+<
+ It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command
+ completely in the executed string: >
+ :execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile'
+<
+
+ *:exe-comment*
+ ":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by
+ a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the
+ start of a string. But, you can use '|' followed by a
+ comment. Example: >
+ :echo "foo" | "this is a comment
+
+==============================================================================
+8. Exception handling *exception-handling*
+
+The Vim script language comprises an exception handling feature. This section
+explains how it can be used in a Vim script.
+
+Exceptions may be raised by Vim on an error or on interrupt, see
+|catch-errors| and |catch-interrupt|. You can also explicitly throw an
+exception by using the ":throw" command, see |throw-catch|.
+
+
+TRY CONDITIONALS *try-conditionals*
+
+Exceptions can be caught or can cause cleanup code to be executed. You can
+use a try conditional to specify catch clauses (that catch exceptions) and/or
+a finally clause (to be executed for cleanup).
+ A try conditional begins with a |:try| command and ends at the matching
+|:endtry| command. In between, you can use a |:catch| command to start
+a catch clause, or a |:finally| command to start a finally clause. There may
+be none or multiple catch clauses, but there is at most one finally clause,
+which must not be followed by any catch clauses. The lines before the catch
+clauses and the finally clause is called a try block. >
+
+ :try
+ : ...
+ : ... TRY BLOCK
+ : ...
+ :catch /{pattern}/
+ : ...
+ : ... CATCH CLAUSE
+ : ...
+ :catch /{pattern}/
+ : ...
+ : ... CATCH CLAUSE
+ : ...
+ :finally
+ : ...
+ : ... FINALLY CLAUSE
+ : ...
+ :endtry
+
+The try conditional allows to watch code for exceptions and to take the
+appropriate actions. Exceptions from the try block may be caught. Exceptions
+from the try block and also the catch clauses may cause cleanup actions.
+ When no exception is thrown during execution of the try block, the control
+is transferred to the finally clause, if present. After its execution, the
+script continues with the line following the ":endtry".
+ When an exception occurs during execution of the try block, the remaining
+lines in the try block are skipped. The exception is matched against the
+patterns specified as arguments to the ":catch" commands. The catch clause
+after the first matching ":catch" is taken, other catch clauses are not
+executed. The catch clause ends when the next ":catch", ":finally", or
+":endtry" command is reached - whatever is first. Then, the finally clause
+(if present) is executed. When the ":endtry" is reached, the script execution
+continues in the following line as usual.
+ When an exception that does not match any of the patterns specified by the
+":catch" commands is thrown in the try block, the exception is not caught by
+that try conditional and none of the catch clauses is executed. Only the
+finally clause, if present, is taken. The exception pends during execution of
+the finally clause. It is resumed at the ":endtry", so that commands after
+the ":endtry" are not executed and the exception might be caught elsewhere,
+see |try-nesting|.
+ When during execution of a catch clause another exception is thrown, the
+remaining lines in that catch clause are not executed. The new exception is
+not matched against the patterns in any of the ":catch" commands of the same
+try conditional and none of its catch clauses is taken. If there is, however,
+a finally clause, it is executed, and the exception pends during its
+execution. The commands following the ":endtry" are not executed. The new
+exception might, however, be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
+ When during execution of the finally clause (if present) an exception is
+thrown, the remaining lines in the finally clause are skipped. If the finally
+clause has been taken because of an exception from the try block or one of the
+catch clauses, the original (pending) exception is discarded. The commands
+following the ":endtry" are not executed, and the exception from the finally
+clause is propagated and can be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|.
+
+The finally clause is also executed, when a ":break" or ":continue" for
+a ":while" loop enclosing the complete try conditional is executed from the
+try block or a catch clause. Or when a ":return" or ":finish" is executed
+from the try block or a catch clause of a try conditional in a function or
+sourced script, respectively. The ":break", ":continue", ":return", or
+":finish" pends during execution of the finally clause and is resumed when the
+":endtry" is reached. It is, however, discarded when an exception is thrown
+from the finally clause.
+ When a ":break" or ":continue" for a ":while" loop enclosing the complete
+try conditional or when a ":return" or ":finish" is encountered in the finally
+clause, the rest of the finally clause is skipped, and the ":break",
+":continue", ":return" or ":finish" is executed as usual. If the finally
+clause has been taken because of an exception or an earlier ":break",
+":continue", ":return", or ":finish" from the try block or a catch clause,
+this pending exception or command is discarded.
+
+For examples see |throw-catch| and |try-finally|.
+
+
+NESTING OF TRY CONDITIONALS *try-nesting*
+
+Try conditionals can be nested arbitrarily. That is, a complete try
+conditional can be put into the try block, a catch clause, or the finally
+clause of another try conditional. If the inner try conditional does not
+catch an exception thrown in its try block or throws a new exception from one
+of its catch clauses or its finally clause, the outer try conditional is
+checked according to the rules above. If the inner try conditional is in the
+try block of the outer try conditional, its catch clauses are checked, but
+otherwise only the finally clause is executed. It does not matter for
+nesting, whether the inner try conditional is directly contained in the outer
+one, or whether the outer one sources a script or calls a function containing
+the inner try conditional.
+
+When none of the active try conditionals catches an exception, just their
+finally clauses are executed. Thereafter, the script processing terminates.
+An error message is displayed in case of an uncaught exception explicitly
+thrown by a ":throw" command. For uncaught error and interrupt exceptions
+implicitly raised by Vim, the error message(s) or interrupt message are shown
+as usual.
+
+For examples see |throw-catch|.
+
+
+EXAMINING EXCEPTION HANDLING CODE *except-examine*
+
+Exception handling code can get tricky. If you are in doubt what happens, set
+'verbose' to 13 or use the ":13verbose" command modifier when sourcing your
+script file. Then you see when an exception is thrown, discarded, caught, or
+finished. When using a verbosity level of at least 14, things pending in
+a finally clause are also shown. This information is also given in debug mode
+(see |debug-scripts|).
+
+
+THROWING AND CATCHING EXCEPTIONS *throw-catch*
+
+You can throw any number or string as an exception. Use the |:throw| command
+and pass the value to be thrown as argument: >
+ :throw 4711
+ :throw "string"
+< *throw-expression*
+You can also specify an expression argument. The expression is then evaluated
+first, and the result is thrown: >
+ :throw 4705 + strlen("string")
+ :throw strpart("strings", 0, 6)
+
+An exception might be thrown during evaluation of the argument of the ":throw"
+command. Unless it is caught there, the expression evaluation is abandoned.
+The ":throw" command then does not throw a new exception.
+ Example: >
+
+ :function! Foo(arg)
+ : try
+ : throw a:arg
+ : catch /foo/
+ : endtry
+ : return 1
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Bar()
+ : echo "in Bar"
+ : return 4710
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :throw Foo("arrgh") + Bar()
+
+This throws "arrgh", and "in Bar" is not displayed since Bar() is not
+executed. >
+ :throw Foo("foo") + Bar()
+however displays "in Bar" and throws 4711.
+
+Any other command that takes an expression as argument might also be
+abandoned by an (uncaught) exception during the expression evaluation. The
+exception is then propagated to the caller of the command.
+ Example: >
+
+ :if Foo("arrgh")
+ : echo "then"
+ :else
+ : echo "else"
+ :endif
+
+Here neither of "then" or "else" is displayed.
+
+ *catch-order*
+Exceptions can be caught by a try conditional with one or more |:catch|
+commands, see |try-conditionals|. The values to be caught by each ":catch"
+command can be specified as a pattern argument. The subsequent catch clause
+gets executed when a matching exception is caught.
+ Example: >
+
+ :function! Foo(value)
+ : try
+ : throw a:value
+ : catch /^\d\+$/
+ : echo "Number thrown"
+ : catch /.*/
+ : echo "String thrown"
+ : endtry
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :call Foo(0x1267)
+ :call Foo('string')
+
+The first call to Foo() displays "Number thrown", the second "String thrown".
+An exception is matched against the ":catch" commands in the order they are
+specified. Only the first match counts. So you should place the more
+specific ":catch" first. The following order does not make sense: >
+
+ : catch /.*/
+ : echo "String thrown"
+ : catch /^\d\+$/
+ : echo "Number thrown"
+
+The first ":catch" here matches always, so that the second catch clause is
+never taken.
+
+ *throw-variables*
+If you catch an exception by a general pattern, you may access the exact value
+in the variable |v:exception|: >
+
+ : catch /^\d\+$/
+ : echo "Number thrown. Value is" v:exception
+
+You may also be interested where an exception was thrown. This is stored in
+|v:throwpoint|. Note that "v:exception" and "v:throwpoint" are valid for the
+exception most recently caught as long it is not finished.
+ Example: >
+
+ :function! Caught()
+ : if v:exception != ""
+ : echo 'Caught "' . v:exception . '" in ' . v:throwpoint
+ : else
+ : echo 'Nothing caught'
+ : endif
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Foo()
+ : try
+ : try
+ : try
+ : throw 4711
+ : finally
+ : call Caught()
+ : endtry
+ : catch /.*/
+ : call Caught()
+ : throw "oops"
+ : endtry
+ : catch /.*/
+ : call Caught()
+ : finally
+ : call Caught()
+ : endtry
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :call Foo()
+
+This displays >
+
+ Nothing caught
+ Caught "4711" in function Foo, line 4
+ Caught "oops" in function Foo, line 10
+ Nothing caught
+
+A practical example: The following command ":LineNumber" displays the line
+number in the script or function where it has been used: >
+
+ :function! LineNumber()
+ : return substitute(v:throwpoint, '.*\D\(\d\+\).*', '\1', "")
+ :endfunction
+ :command! LineNumber try | throw "" | catch | echo LineNumber() | endtry
+<
+ *try-nested*
+An exception that is not caught by a try conditional can be caught by
+a surrounding try conditional: >
+
+ :try
+ : try
+ : throw "foo"
+ : catch /foobar/
+ : echo "foobar"
+ : finally
+ : echo "inner finally"
+ : endtry
+ :catch /foo/
+ : echo "foo"
+ :endtry
+
+The inner try conditional does not catch the exception, just its finally
+clause is executed. The exception is then caught by the outer try
+conditional. The example displays "inner finally" and then "foo".
+
+ *throw-from-catch*
+You can catch an exception and throw a new one to be caught elsewhere from the
+catch clause: >
+
+ :function! Foo()
+ : throw "foo"
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Bar()
+ : try
+ : call Foo()
+ : catch /foo/
+ : echo "Caught foo, throw bar"
+ : throw "bar"
+ : endtry
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :try
+ : call Bar()
+ :catch /.*/
+ : echo "Caught" v:exception
+ :endtry
+
+This displays "Caught foo, throw bar" and then "Caught bar".
+
+ *rethrow*
+There is no real rethrow in the Vim script language, but you may throw
+"v:exception" instead: >
+
+ :function! Bar()
+ : try
+ : call Foo()
+ : catch /.*/
+ : echo "Rethrow" v:exception
+ : throw v:exception
+ : endtry
+ :endfunction
+< *try-echoerr*
+Note that this method cannot be used to "rethrow" Vim error or interrupt
+exceptions, because it is not possible to fake Vim internal exceptions.
+Trying so causes an error exception. You should throw your own exception
+denoting the situation. If you want to cause a Vim error exception containing
+the original error exception value, you can use the |:echoerr| command: >
+
+ :try
+ : try
+ : asdf
+ : catch /.*/
+ : echoerr v:exception
+ : endtry
+ :catch /.*/
+ : echo v:exception
+ :endtry
+
+This code displays
+
+ Vim(echoerr):Vim:E492: Not an editor command: asdf ~
+
+
+CLEANUP CODE *try-finally*
+
+Scripts often change global settings and restore them at their end. If the
+user however interrupts the script by pressing CTRL-C, the settings remain in
+an inconsistent state. The same may happen to you in the development phase of
+a script when an error occurs or you explicitly throw an exception without
+catching it. You can solve these problems by using a try conditional with
+a finally clause for restoring the settings. Its execution is guaranteed on
+normal control flow, on error, on an explicit ":throw", and on interrupt.
+(Note that errors and interrupts from inside the try conditional are converted
+to exceptions. When not caught, they terminate the script after the finally
+clause has been executed.)
+Example: >
+
+ :try
+ : let s:saved_ts = &ts
+ : set ts=17
+ :
+ : " Do the hard work here.
+ :
+ :finally
+ : let &ts = s:saved_ts
+ : unlet s:saved_ts
+ :endtry
+
+This method should be used locally whenever a function or part of a script
+changes global settings which need to be restored on failure or normal exit of
+that function or script part.
+
+ *break-finally*
+Cleanup code works also when the try block or a catch clause is left by
+a ":continue", ":break", ":return", or ":finish".
+ Example: >
+
+ :let first = 1
+ :while 1
+ : try
+ : if first
+ : echo "first"
+ : let first = 0
+ : continue
+ : else
+ : throw "second"
+ : endif
+ : catch /.*/
+ : echo v:exception
+ : break
+ : finally
+ : echo "cleanup"
+ : endtry
+ : echo "still in while"
+ :endwhile
+ :echo "end"
+
+This displays "first", "cleanup", "second", "cleanup", and "end". >
+
+ :function! Foo()
+ : try
+ : return 4711
+ : finally
+ : echo "cleanup\n"
+ : endtry
+ : echo "Foo still active"
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :echo Foo() "returned by Foo"
+
+This displays "cleanup" and "4711 returned by Foo". You don't need to add an
+extra ":return" in the finally clause. (Above all, this would override the
+return value.)
+
+ *except-from-finally*
+Using either of ":continue", ":break", ":return", ":finish", or ":throw" in
+a finally clause is possible, but not recommended since it abandons the
+cleanup actions for the try conditional. But, of course, interrupt and error
+exceptions might get raised from a finally clause.
+ Example where an error in the finally clause stops an interrupt from
+working correctly: >
+
+ :try
+ : try
+ : echo "Press CTRL-C for interrupt"
+ : while 1
+ : endwhile
+ : finally
+ : unlet novar
+ : endtry
+ :catch /novar/
+ :endtry
+ :echo "Script still running"
+ :sleep 1
+
+If you need to put commands that could fail into a finally clause, you should
+think about catching or ignoring the errors in these commands, see
+|catch-errors| and |ignore-errors|.
+
+
+CATCHING ERRORS *catch-errors*
+
+If you want to catch specific errors, you just have to put the code to be
+watched in a try block and add a catch clause for the error message. The
+presence of the try conditional causes all errors to be converted to an
+exception. No message is displayed and |v:errmsg| is not set then. To find
+the right pattern for the ":catch" command, you have to know how the format of
+the error exception is.
+ Error exceptions have the following format: >
+
+ Vim({cmdname}):{errmsg}
+or >
+ Vim:{errmsg}
+
+{cmdname} is the name of the command that failed; the second form is used when
+the command name is not known. {errmsg} is the error message usually produced
+when the error occurs outside try conditionals. It always begins with
+a capital "E", followed by a two or three-digit error number, a colon, and
+a space.
+
+Examples:
+
+The command >
+ :unlet novar
+normally produces the error message >
+ E108: No such variable: "novar"
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+ Vim(unlet):E108: No such variable: "novar"
+
+The command >
+ :dwim
+normally produces the error message >
+ E492: Not an editor command: dwim
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+ Vim:E492: Not an editor command: dwim
+
+You can catch all ":unlet" errors by a >
+ :catch /^Vim(unlet):/
+or all errors for misspelled command names by a >
+ :catch /^Vim:E492:/
+
+Some error messages may be produced by different commands: >
+ :function nofunc
+and >
+ :delfunction nofunc
+both produce the error message >
+ E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception >
+ Vim(function):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+or >
+ Vim(delfunction):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc
+respectively. You can catch the error by its number independently on the
+command that caused it if you use the following pattern: >
+ :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E128:/
+
+Some commands like >
+ :let x = novar
+produce multiple error messages, here: >
+ E121: Undefined variable: novar
+ E15: Invalid expression: novar
+Only the first is used for the exception value, since it is the most specific
+one (see |except-several-errors|). So you can catch it by >
+ :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E121:/
+
+You can catch all errors related to the name "nofunc" by >
+ :catch /\<nofunc\>/
+
+You can catch all Vim errors in the ":write" and ":read" commands by >
+ :catch /^Vim(\(write\|read\)):E\d\+:/
+
+You can catch all Vim errors by the pattern >
+ :catch /^Vim\((\a\+)\)\=:E\d\+:/
+<
+ *catch-text*
+NOTE: You should never catch the error message text itself: >
+ :catch /No such variable/
+only works in the english locale, but not when the user has selected
+a different language by the |:language| command. It is however helpful to
+cite the message text in a comment: >
+ :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E108:/ " No such variable
+
+
+IGNORING ERRORS *ignore-errors*
+
+You can ignore errors in a specific Vim command by catching them locally: >
+
+ :try
+ : write
+ :catch
+ :endtry
+
+But you are strongly recommended NOT to use this simple form, since it could
+catch more than you want. With the ":write" command, some autocommands could
+be executed and cause errors not related to writing, for instance: >
+
+ :au BufWritePre * unlet novar
+
+There could even be such errors you are not responsible for as a script
+writer: a user of your script might have defined such autocommands. You would
+then hide the error from the user.
+ It is much better to use >
+
+ :try
+ : write
+ :catch /^Vim(write):/
+ :endtry
+
+which only catches real write errors. So catch only what you'd like to ignore
+intentionally.
+
+For a single command that does not cause execution of autocommands, you could
+even suppress the conversion of errors to exceptions by the ":silent!"
+command: >
+ :silent! nunmap k
+This works also when a try conditional is active.
+
+
+CATCHING INTERRUPTS *catch-interrupt*
+
+When there are active try conditionals, an interrupt (CTRL-C) is converted to
+the exception "Vim:Interrupt". You can catch it like every exception. The
+script is not terminated, then.
+ Example: >
+
+ :function! TASK1()
+ : sleep 10
+ :endfunction
+
+ :function! TASK2()
+ : sleep 20
+ :endfunction
+
+ :while 1
+ : let command = input("Type a command: ")
+ : try
+ : if command == ""
+ : continue
+ : elseif command == "END"
+ : break
+ : elseif command == "TASK1"
+ : call TASK1()
+ : elseif command == "TASK2"
+ : call TASK2()
+ : else
+ : echo "\nIllegal command:" command
+ : continue
+ : endif
+ : catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
+ : echo "\nCommand interrupted"
+ : " Caught the interrupt. Continue with next prompt.
+ : endtry
+ :endwhile
+
+You can interrupt a task here by pressing CTRL-C; the script then asks for
+a new command. If you press CTRL-C at the prompt, the script is terminated.
+
+For testing what happens when CTRL-C would be pressed on a specific line in
+your script, use the debug mode and execute the |>quit| or |>interrupt|
+command on that line. See |debug-scripts|.
+
+
+CATCHING ALL *catch-all*
+
+The commands >
+
+ :catch /.*/
+ :catch //
+ :catch
+
+catch everything, error exceptions, interrupt exceptions and exceptions
+explicitly thrown by the |:throw| command. This is useful at the top level of
+a script in order to catch unexpected things.
+ Example: >
+
+ :try
+ :
+ : " do the hard work here
+ :
+ :catch /MyException/
+ :
+ : " handle known problem
+ :
+ :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/
+ : echo "Script interrupted"
+ :catch /.*/
+ : echo "Internal error (" . v:exception . ")"
+ : echo " - occurred at " . v:throwpoint
+ :endtry
+ :" end of script
+
+Note: Catching all might catch more things than you want. Thus, you are
+strongly encouraged to catch only for problems that you can really handle by
+specifying a pattern argument to the ":catch".
+ Example: Catching all could make it nearly impossible to interrupt a script
+by pressing CTRL-C: >
+
+ :while 1
+ : try
+ : sleep 1
+ : catch
+ : endtry
+ :endwhile
+
+
+EXCEPTIONS AND AUTOCOMMANDS *except-autocmd*
+
+Exceptions may be used during execution of autocommands. Example: >
+
+ :autocmd User x try
+ :autocmd User x throw "Oops!"
+ :autocmd User x catch
+ :autocmd User x echo v:exception
+ :autocmd User x endtry
+ :autocmd User x throw "Arrgh!"
+ :autocmd User x echo "Should not be displayed"
+ :
+ :try
+ : doautocmd User x
+ :catch
+ : echo v:exception
+ :endtry
+
+This displays "Oops!" and "Arrgh!".
+
+ *except-autocmd-Pre*
+For some commands, autocommands get executed before the main action of the
+command takes place. If an exception is thrown and not caught in the sequence
+of autocommands, the sequence and the command that caused its execution are
+abandoned and the exception is propagated to the caller of the command.
+ Example: >
+
+ :autocmd BufWritePre * throw "FAIL"
+ :autocmd BufWritePre * echo "Should not be displayed"
+ :
+ :try
+ : write
+ :catch
+ : echo "Caught:" v:exception "from" v:throwpoint
+ :endtry
+
+Here, the ":write" command does not write the file currently being edited (as
+you can see by checking 'modified'), since the exception from the BufWritePre
+autocommand abandons the ":write". The exception is then caught and the
+script displays: >
+
+ Caught: FAIL from BufWrite Auto commands for "*"
+<
+ *except-autocmd-Post*
+For some commands, autocommands get executed after the main action of the
+command has taken place. If this main action fails and the command is inside
+an active try conditional, the autocommands are skipped and an error exception
+is thrown that can be caught by the caller of the command.
+ Example: >
+
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "File successfully written!"
+ :
+ :try
+ : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+ :catch
+ : echo v:exception
+ :endtry
+
+This just displays: >
+
+ Vim(write):E212: Can't open file for writing (/i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e)
+
+If you really need to execute the autocommands even when the main action
+fails, trigger the event from the catch clause.
+ Example: >
+
+ :autocmd BufWritePre * set noreadonly
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * set readonly
+ :
+ :try
+ : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+ :catch
+ : doautocmd BufWritePost /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+ :endtry
+<
+You can also use ":silent!": >
+
+ :let x = "ok"
+ :let v:errmsg = ""
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * if v:errmsg != ""
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * let x = "after fail"
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * endif
+ :try
+ : silent! write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e
+ :catch
+ :endtry
+ :echo x
+
+This displays "after fail".
+
+If the main action of the command does not fail, exceptions from the
+autocommands will be catchable by the caller of the command: >
+
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * throw ":-("
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "Should not be displayed"
+ :
+ :try
+ : write
+ :catch
+ : echo v:exception
+ :endtry
+<
+ *except-autocmd-Cmd*
+For some commands, the normal action can be replaced by a sequence of
+autocommands. Exceptions from that sequence will be catchable by the caller
+of the command.
+ Example: For the ":write" command, the caller cannot know whether the file
+had actually been written when the exception occurred. You need to tell it in
+some way. >
+
+ :if !exists("cnt")
+ : let cnt = 0
+ :
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if &modified
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * let cnt = cnt + 1
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 2
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError"
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * write | set nomodified
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 0
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError"
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * echo "File successfully written!"
+ : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif
+ :endif
+ :
+ :try
+ : write
+ :catch /^BufWriteCmdError$/
+ : if &modified
+ : echo "Error on writing (file contents not changed)"
+ : else
+ : echo "Error after writing"
+ : endif
+ :catch /^Vim(write):/
+ : echo "Error on writing"
+ :endtry
+
+When this script is sourced several times after making changes, it displays
+first >
+ File successfully written!
+then >
+ Error on writing (file contents not changed)
+then >
+ Error after writing
+etc.
+
+ *except-autocmd-ill*
+You cannot spread a try conditional over autocommands for different events.
+The following code is ill-formed: >
+
+ :autocmd BufWritePre * try
+ :
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * catch
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * echo v:exception
+ :autocmd BufWritePost * endtry
+ :
+ :write
+
+
+EXCEPTION HIERARCHIES AND PARAMETERIZED EXCEPTIONS *except-hier-param*
+
+Some programming languages allow to use hierarchies of exception classes or to
+pass additional information with the object of an exception class. You can do
+similar things in Vim.
+ In order to throw an exception from a hierarchy, just throw the complete
+class name with the components separated by a colon, for instance throw the
+string "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" for an overflow in a mathematical library.
+ When you want to pass additional information with your exception class, add
+it in parentheses, for instance throw the string "EXCEPT:IO:WRITEERR(myfile)"
+for an error when writing "myfile".
+ With the appropriate patterns in the ":catch" command, you can catch for
+base classes or derived classes of your hierarchy. Additional information in
+parentheses can be cut out from |v:exception| with the ":substitute" command.
+ Example: >
+
+ :function! CheckRange(a, func)
+ : if a:a < 0
+ : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE(" . a:func . ")"
+ : endif
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Add(a, b)
+ : call CheckRange(a:a, "Add")
+ : call CheckRange(a:b, "Add")
+ : let c = a:a + a:b
+ : if c < 0
+ : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW"
+ : endif
+ : return c
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Div(a, b)
+ : call CheckRange(a:a, "Div")
+ : call CheckRange(a:b, "Div")
+ : if (a:b == 0)
+ : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:ZERODIV"
+ : endif
+ : return a:a / a:b
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :function! Write(file)
+ : try
+ : execute "write" fnameescape(a:file)
+ : catch /^Vim(write):/
+ : throw "EXCEPT:IO(" . getcwd() . ", " . a:file . "):WRITEERR"
+ : endtry
+ :endfunction
+ :
+ :try
+ :
+ : " something with arithmetics and I/O
+ :
+ :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE/
+ : let function = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(\a\+\)).*', '\1', "")
+ : echo "Range error in" function
+ :
+ :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR/ " catches OVERFLOW and ZERODIV
+ : echo "Math error"
+ :
+ :catch /^EXCEPT:IO/
+ : let dir = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(.\+\),\s*.\+).*', '\1', "")
+ : let file = substitute(v:exception, '.*(.\+,\s*\(.\+\)).*', '\1', "")
+ : if file !~ '^/'
+ : let file = dir . "/" . file
+ : endif
+ : echo 'I/O error for "' . file . '"'
+ :
+ :catch /^EXCEPT/
+ : echo "Unspecified error"
+ :
+ :endtry
+
+The exceptions raised by Vim itself (on error or when pressing CTRL-C) use
+a flat hierarchy: they are all in the "Vim" class. You cannot throw yourself
+exceptions with the "Vim" prefix; they are reserved for Vim.
+ Vim error exceptions are parameterized with the name of the command that
+failed, if known. See |catch-errors|.
+
+
+PECULIARITIES
+ *except-compat*
+The exception handling concept requires that the command sequence causing the
+exception is aborted immediately and control is transferred to finally clauses
+and/or a catch clause.
+
+In the Vim script language there are cases where scripts and functions
+continue after an error: in functions without the "abort" flag or in a command
+after ":silent!", control flow goes to the following line, and outside
+functions, control flow goes to the line following the outermost ":endwhile"
+or ":endif". On the other hand, errors should be catchable as exceptions
+(thus, requiring the immediate abortion).
+
+This problem has been solved by converting errors to exceptions and using
+immediate abortion (if not suppressed by ":silent!") only when a try
+conditional is active. This is no restriction since an (error) exception can
+be caught only from an active try conditional. If you want an immediate
+termination without catching the error, just use a try conditional without
+catch clause. (You can cause cleanup code being executed before termination
+by specifying a finally clause.)
+
+When no try conditional is active, the usual abortion and continuation
+behavior is used instead of immediate abortion. This ensures compatibility of
+scripts written for Vim 6.1 and earlier.
+
+However, when sourcing an existing script that does not use exception handling
+commands (or when calling one of its functions) from inside an active try
+conditional of a new script, you might change the control flow of the existing
+script on error. You get the immediate abortion on error and can catch the
+error in the new script. If however the sourced script suppresses error
+messages by using the ":silent!" command (checking for errors by testing
+|v:errmsg| if appropriate), its execution path is not changed. The error is
+not converted to an exception. (See |:silent|.) So the only remaining cause
+where this happens is for scripts that don't care about errors and produce
+error messages. You probably won't want to use such code from your new
+scripts.
+
+ *except-syntax-err*
+Syntax errors in the exception handling commands are never caught by any of
+the ":catch" commands of the try conditional they belong to. Its finally
+clauses, however, is executed.
+ Example: >
+
+ :try
+ : try
+ : throw 4711
+ : catch /\(/
+ : echo "in catch with syntax error"
+ : catch
+ : echo "inner catch-all"
+ : finally
+ : echo "inner finally"
+ : endtry
+ :catch
+ : echo 'outer catch-all caught "' . v:exception . '"'
+ : finally
+ : echo "outer finally"
+ :endtry
+
+This displays: >
+ inner finally
+ outer catch-all caught "Vim(catch):E54: Unmatched \("
+ outer finally
+The original exception is discarded and an error exception is raised, instead.
+
+ *except-single-line*
+The ":try", ":catch", ":finally", and ":endtry" commands can be put on
+a single line, but then syntax errors may make it difficult to recognize the
+"catch" line, thus you better avoid this.
+ Example: >
+ :try | unlet! foo # | catch | endtry
+raises an error exception for the trailing characters after the ":unlet!"
+argument, but does not see the ":catch" and ":endtry" commands, so that the
+error exception is discarded and the "E488: Trailing characters" message gets
+displayed.
+
+ *except-several-errors*
+When several errors appear in a single command, the first error message is
+usually the most specific one and therefor converted to the error exception.
+ Example: >
+ echo novar
+causes >
+ E121: Undefined variable: novar
+ E15: Invalid expression: novar
+The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
+ Vim(echo):E121: Undefined variable: novar
+< *except-syntax-error*
+But when a syntax error is detected after a normal error in the same command,
+the syntax error is used for the exception being thrown.
+ Example: >
+ unlet novar #
+causes >
+ E108: No such variable: "novar"
+ E488: Trailing characters
+The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: >
+ Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters
+This is done because the syntax error might change the execution path in a way
+not intended by the user. Example: >
+ try
+ try | unlet novar # | catch | echo v:exception | endtry
+ catch /.*/
+ echo "outer catch:" v:exception
+ endtry
+This displays "outer catch: Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters", and then
+a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|.
+
+==============================================================================
+9. Examples *eval-examples*
+
+Printing in Binary ~
+>
+ :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number.
+ :func Nr2Bin(nr)
+ : let n = a:nr
+ : let r = ""
+ : while n
+ : let r = '01'[n % 2] . r
+ : let n = n / 2
+ : endwhile
+ : return r
+ :endfunc
+
+ :" The function String2Bin() converts each character in a string to a
+ :" binary string, separated with dashes.
+ :func String2Bin(str)
+ : let out = ''
+ : for ix in range(strlen(a:str))
+ : let out = out . '-' . Nr2Bin(char2nr(a:str[ix]))
+ : endfor
+ : return out[1:]
+ :endfunc
+
+Example of its use: >
+ :echo Nr2Bin(32)
+result: "100000" >
+ :echo String2Bin("32")
+result: "110011-110010"
+
+
+Sorting lines ~
+
+This example sorts lines with a specific compare function. >
+
+ :func SortBuffer()
+ : let lines = getline(1, '$')
+ : call sort(lines, function("Strcmp"))
+ : call setline(1, lines)
+ :endfunction
+
+As a one-liner: >
+ :call setline(1, sort(getline(1, '$'), function("Strcmp")))
+
+
+scanf() replacement ~
+ *sscanf*
+There is no sscanf() function in Vim. If you need to extract parts from a
+line, you can use matchstr() and substitute() to do it. This example shows
+how to get the file name, line number and column number out of a line like
+"foobar.txt, 123, 45". >
+ :" Set up the match bit
+ :let mx='\(\f\+\),\s*\(\d\+\),\s*\(\d\+\)'
+ :"get the part matching the whole expression
+ :let l = matchstr(line, mx)
+ :"get each item out of the match
+ :let file = substitute(l, mx, '\1', '')
+ :let lnum = substitute(l, mx, '\2', '')
+ :let col = substitute(l, mx, '\3', '')
+
+The input is in the variable "line", the results in the variables "file",
+"lnum" and "col". (idea from Michael Geddes)
+
+
+getting the scriptnames in a Dictionary ~
+ *scriptnames-dictionary*
+The |:scriptnames| command can be used to get a list of all script files that
+have been sourced. There is no equivalent function or variable for this
+(because it's rarely needed). In case you need to manipulate the list this
+code can be used: >
+ " Get the output of ":scriptnames" in the scriptnames_output variable.
+ let scriptnames_output = ''
+ redir => scriptnames_output
+ silent scriptnames
+ redir END
+
+ " Split the output into lines and parse each line. Add an entry to the
+ " "scripts" dictionary.
+ let scripts = {}
+ for line in split(scriptnames_output, "\n")
+ " Only do non-blank lines.
+ if line =~ '\S'
+ " Get the first number in the line.
+ let nr = matchstr(line, '\d\+')
+ " Get the file name, remove the script number " 123: ".
+ let name = substitute(line, '.\+:\s*', '', '')
+ " Add an item to the Dictionary
+ let scripts[nr] = name
+ endif
+ endfor
+ unlet scriptnames_output
+
+==============================================================================
+10. No +eval feature *no-eval-feature*
+
+When the |+eval| feature was disabled at compile time, none of the expression
+evaluation commands are available. To prevent this from causing Vim scripts
+to generate all kinds of errors, the ":if" and ":endif" commands are still
+recognized, though the argument of the ":if" and everything between the ":if"
+and the matching ":endif" is ignored. Nesting of ":if" blocks is allowed, but
+only if the commands are at the start of the line. The ":else" command is not
+recognized.
+
+Example of how to avoid executing commands when the |+eval| feature is
+missing: >
+
+ :if 1
+ : echo "Expression evaluation is compiled in"
+ :else
+ : echo "You will _never_ see this message"
+ :endif
+
+==============================================================================
+11. The sandbox *eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48*
+
+The 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and
+'foldtext' options may be evaluated in a sandbox. This means that you are
+protected from these expressions having nasty side effects. This gives some
+safety for when these options are set from a modeline. It is also used when
+the command from a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line.
+The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command.
+
+These items are not allowed in the sandbox:
+ - changing the buffer text
+ - defining or changing mapping, autocommands, functions, user commands
+ - setting certain options (see |option-summary|)
+ - setting certain v: variables (see |v:var|) *E794*
+ - executing a shell command
+ - reading or writing a file
+ - jumping to another buffer or editing a file
+ - executing Python, Perl, etc. commands
+This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks.
+
+ *:san* *:sandbox*
+:san[dbox] {cmd} Execute {cmd} in the sandbox. Useful to evaluate an
+ option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g.
+ 'foldexpr'.
+
+ *sandbox-option*
+A few options contain an expression. When this expression is evaluated it may
+have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk. But the sandbox is
+restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure
+location. Insecure in this context are:
+- sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directory
+- while executing in the sandbox
+- value coming from a modeline
+
+Note that when in the sandbox and saving an option value and restoring it, the
+option will still be marked as it was set in the sandbox.
+
+==============================================================================
+12. Textlock *textlock*
+
+In a few situations it is not allowed to change the text in the buffer, jump
+to another window and some other things that might confuse or break what Vim
+is currently doing. This mostly applies to things that happen when Vim is
+actually doing something else. For example, evaluating the 'balloonexpr' may
+happen any moment the mouse cursor is resting at some position.
+
+This is not allowed when the textlock is active:
+ - changing the buffer text
+ - jumping to another buffer or window
+ - editing another file
+ - closing a window or quitting Vim
+ - etc.
+
+
+ vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: